Piper's Pit BBS/FTP: ibm 0010 - 0019/ibm0010-0019/ibm0010.tar/ibm0010/ADVISOR.ZIP/ADVISE.EXE/WP.(T)

Text File | 1990-05-29 | 419.1 KB | 10,139 lines

A)Advance(A

     Advances the printer to a specific line or position on the
page.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Other
           Advance
           Up; Down; Line; Left; Right; Position
           <measurement to advance> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     The Advance feature advances the printer to a specific
position on the page. To advance the printer up, down, left, or
right of the current printing position (that is, the place where
the [Adv] code is entered), enter a distance that is relative to
the cursor's position when you use the command. To advance the
printer to a specific line or column, enter a measurement that is
an absolute position on the page. When using the Advance to Line
option, enter the distance from the top of the page. When using
the Advance to Position option, enter the distance from the left
edge of the page.
     To use the Advance feature, move the cursor to the place
where you want the advance to begin and follow the key sequence.
After you press F7 (Exit), type the text to be advanced.
     Although the status line will reflect the advance position,
the cursor does not move when you use this command. To return to
the original position when using Advance Up, Down, Left, or Right,
select the opposite Advance option (down if you used up, right if
you used left, and so on), and enter the same distance you
specified earlier. To return to the original line or column when
using Advance to Line or Advance to Position, repeat the advance
procedure, selecting the same Advance option but entering the
original line or offset position as the distance. To prevent the
text from being advanced as indicated, locate the appropriate
[Adv] code in the Reveal Codes screen and delete it.
     The Advance feature is especially useful in layout work
involving text and graphics on a page. You can use it to fine-tune
the placement of headings in text boxes and to position text that
overlays other types of graphics on the page (see Graphics).

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Font
     Display Pitch
     Graphics
     Printing Current Document

A)Append Block(A

     Adds a marked block of text to the end of another document.

B)Key Sequence--Appending a Sentence, Paragraph, or Page(B

          Ctrl-F4 (Move) or Edit pull-down then Select
           Sentence; Paragraph; Page
           Append
           <filename>

B)Key Sequence--Appending a Block, Column, or Rectangle(B

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight block of text with cursor keys]
           Ctrl-F4 (Move) then Block; Tabular Column; Rectangle
          or Edit pull-down
           Append
           <file name>

B)Usage(B

     When you append a block of text, WordPerfect adds it to the
end of a document saved on disk. You can append a discrete block
of text such as a sentence, paragraph, or page without marking it
as a block first. When appending any other type of block (such as
several words but not an entire sentence, several lines but not an
entire paragraph) or a tabular column or rectangle, you must use
Block to mark the text to be appended before you use Move (Ctrl-
F4).
     When using either method, indicate the type of block and
select the Append option. You are then asked for the name of the
file to which this text will be appended. Type in the file name.
If this file is not in the current (default) directory, include
the path name. After entering the name, press ─┘ to have the text
added to the end of the disk file.

     Note: You can also append the text of a disk file to the
document currently in the editing screen. To do this, move to the
end of the document (Home Home Down Arrow), select Retrieve Text
(Shift-F10), and enter the name of the document whose text you
want appended. The same thing happens when you use the Retrieve
option on the List Files menu and have a document on the editing
screen.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Copying Files
     Cut and Copy Text
     Master Document
     Merge Operations
     Move/Rename File
     Retrieve

A)Base Font(A

     Changes the basic font used in printing the document from the
cursor's position forward.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F8 (Font) or Font pull-down
           Base Font
           [highlight font] or N Name Search
           Select; or [double-click with mouse]

B)Usage(B

     The current font represents the font in which the text is
normally printed. This font depends upon the printer you have
selected and the initial font you have assigned to it (see
Printer, Edit). To switch to a new basic font in the document, use
the Base Font option on the Font menu. When you select a new font
in this way, it becomes the new current font from the cursor's
position forward in the document.
     The current font also determines what sizes will be used when
you select different font size options such as Fine, Small, or
Large, or different attribute options such as Bold or Italics (see
Font). For example, if you select a new base font of Times Roman
10 point, WordPerfect will use Times Roman 10 point bold to print
boldfaced text in the document, Times Roman 10 point Italic to
print italicized text, and so on. Likewise, when you make a change
to the size, it will use different-sized fonts in the Times Roman
family, such as Times Roman 6 point for Fine, Times Roman 8 point
for Small, Times Roman 12 point for Large, and so forth. The
actual sizes chosen for each change in size depend upon the fonts
your printer supports and the fonts you have selected for that
printer. Moreover, the font choices available when you change the
current font with the Base Font option are determined by the fonts
you have selected for the printer you are using (see Cartridges
and Fonts). To prevent a font change from taking place, locate the
[Font] code in the Reveal Codes screen and delete it.
     You can also change the base font by using the Format menu
(Shift-F8) and selecting the Document option; then select Initial
Base Font. Do this when you want to override in the current
document only the initial base font selected for your printer.
     Changing the base font from the Font pull-down menu, the
Format menu (Shift-F8), or the Font key (Ctrl-F8) all change the
base font only in your current document. To change the base font
that you have assigned to your printer, see Printer, Edit.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Bold
     Cartridges and Fonts
     Font
     Printer, Edit

A)Binding Offset(A

     Shifts text to the right on odd-numbered pages and to the
left on even-numbered pages.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Binding Offset
           <measurement for binding width> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     You can use the Binding Offset option on the Print menu to
ensure that there is sufficient room to bind the document when it
is going to be reproduced on two-sided copies. To determine how
far the text is shifted to the right on odd-numbered pages and to
the left on even-numbered pages, you set a binding width.
     The binding width is entered as an absolute measurement from
the left or right edge of the paper and overrides the left- and
right-margin settings that are in effect. You can enter the
binding width anytime prior to printing the document.
     If you intend to reproduce the document on just one side of
the paper, you can ignore the Binding Offset option; just increase
the left-margin setting to allow sufficient room for binding.
     To remove the binding width before printing a document during
the same work session, select Binding Offset from the Print menu
and enter 0 as the binding width measurement.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Paper Size/Type
     Print Options
     Printing Current Document

A)Block Operations(A

     Defines a block of text on which you can then perform many
operations.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight block]
           [select the operation to be performed on the block]

B)Usage(B

     The Block command is used to highlight (mark) a section of
text for use with other WordPerfect commands. Once you have marked
a block of text, you can use any of the following WordPerfect
features:

          Align; Append; Bold; Center; Comment; Convert Case;
          Copy; Delete; Flush Right; Font: Appearance and Size;
          Format (Block Protect); Macro; Mark Text: Index, List,
          Table of Authorities, Table of Contents; Mouse; Move:
          Block, Tabular Column, Rectangle; Print; Replace; Save;
          Search; Shell (if using the WordPerfect Library); Sort;
          Spell; Style; Switch; Tables; Text In/Out; Underline.

B)Usage--Marking a Block(B

     To mark a block of text, position the cursor at the beginning
of the block and select Block. The message "Block on" will blink
on and off at the bottom left of your screen. Position the cursor
at the end of the block; as you move the cursor, the text included
will be highlighted. Then select the operation you want applied to
the block.
     When marking the block, you have several options for
positioning the cursor. Use the Search feature to move the cursor
forward or backward to a particular place in the document. Press
─┘ to extend the block to the next [HRt] code (hard return). Type
a particular character to extend the block to that character--such
as a period to include text up to the end of the sentence. Press
Up Arrow or Down Arrow to extend the block up or down to include
several lines. Press Ctrl-Right Arrow to extend the block to
include several words.
     Many WordPerfect commands behave differently if you have
marked the text before using them. The differences are summarized
in the following table.

Block Commands:
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     KEY            F1 (Cancel)
     BLOCK ON       Cancels block
     BLOCK OFF      Cancels; Undeletes

     KEY            Alt-F2 (Replace)
     BLOCK ON       Replaces block
     BLOCK OFF      Replaces in document

     KEY            Ctrl-F2 (Spell)
     BLOCK ON       Checks block
     BLOCK OFF      Checks word, page, or document; Changes
                    dictionary, Looks up word; Gets word count

     KEY            Shift-F3 (Switch)
     BLOCK ON       Uppercases or lowercases block
     BLOCK OFF      Switches to other window

     KEY            Ctrl-F4 (Move)
     BLOCK ON       Cuts, copies, moves, or appends block;
                    Cuts/copies column or rectangle
     BLOCK OFF      Moves sentence, paragraph, or page; Retrieves
                    column, text or rectangle

     KEY            Alt-F5 (Mark Text)
     BLOCK ON       Marks for ToC, list, paragraph numbering
     BLOCK OFF      Turns outlining, redline, strikeout, index
                    numbering on/off; Enters short form for ToA;
                    Other options define styles for paragraph and
                    outline numbering, ToC, index, and lists;
                    Deletes redline; Edits ToA; Generates ToC and
                    lists; Generates cross references; creates
                    master documents

     KEY            F6 (Bold)
     BLOCK ON       Bolds block
     BLOCK OFF      Bolds as text is entered

     KEY            Alt-F6 (Flush Rt)
     BLOCK ON       Moves block flush right
     BLOCK OFF      Moves text flush right as you enter it

     KEY            Shift-F6 (Center)
     BLOCK ON       Centers block
     BLOCK OFF      Centers text as you enter it

     KEY            Shift-F7 (Print)
     BLOCK ON       Prints block
     BLOCK OFF      Accesses Print menu

     KEY            F8 (Underline)
     BLOCK ON       Underlines block
     BLOCK OFF      Underlines text as you enter it

     KEY            Shift-F8 (Format)
     BLOCK ON       Protects block
     BLOCK OFF      Accesses page format options

     KEY            Ctrl-F9 (Merge/Sort)
     BLOCK ON       Sorts block
     BLOCK OFF      Merges; Sorts; Specifies sort sequence

     KEY            F10 (Save)
     BLOCK ON       Saves block in new file
     BLOCK OFF      Saves document

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

B)Usage--Marking a Block with the Mouse(B

     To use the mouse for blocking text, select the beginning of
the text you want to block by clicking and holding the left mouse
button. Then drag the mouse (see Mouse) to the end of the
selection. When the text you want to block is highlighted, release
the left mouse button. You can change the size of the blocked area
by using the arrow keys or the Search feature to extend the
blocking to the character or word you specify.
     You can also turn on blocking from the pull-down menus by
selecting Edit and then Block.

B)Usage--Rehighlighting a Block(B

     After you mark the block and select a WordPerfect feature,
the highlighting and the "Block on" message will disappear. To
rehighlight the block you just used, press Block (Alt-F4) and then
Go To (Ctrl-Home) twice. To move the cursor directly to the
beginning of the block, press Go To (Ctrl-Home) followed by Block
(Alt-F4).
     Press Cancel (F1) or Block (Alt-F4) to turn off the "Block
on" prompt and cancel the intended block operation.
     To cancel blocking with a mouse, click outside the
highlighted area. You can also cancel blocking by clicking both
buttons at the same time (on a two-button mouse), or the left and
right buttons (on a three-button mouse). In addition, you can use
the Cancel key (F1).

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Append Block
     Block Protect
     Bold
     Center
     Columns, Text (Newspaper and Parallel)
     Cut and Copy Text
     Mark Text
     Mouse (Version 5.1)
     Redline/Strikeout
     Sort and Select
     Speller--General
     Underline

A)Block Protect(A

     Prevents a marked block of text from being split by a soft
page break.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight block of text]
           Shift-F8 (Format) then Protect block? No (Yes)
          or Edit pull-down then Protect Block

B)Usage(B

     You can use block protection to ensure that any block of text
is not split between pages. If you make editing changes that would
split the protected text between pages, WordPerfect will shift the
entire block to the following page. You can use this feature
effectively to keep tables on a single page.
     To block-protect text, move the cursor to the beginning of
the block, select Block, and move the cursor to the end of the
block. Then select Format, and in response to the prompt, select Y
to have the block protected; or select Protect Block from the Edit
pull-down menu.
     To remove block protection, locate the [Block Pro:On] or
[Block Pro:Off] code in the Reveal Codes screen and delete it.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Conditional End of Page
     Hard Space
     Mouse (Version 5.1)
     Page Break, Soft and Hard
     Tables
     Widow/Orphan Protection

A)Bold(A

     Enhances the selected text by printing it in a boldface font
or with doublestrike.

B)Key Sequence--Boldfacing Text As You Type It(B

          F6 (Bold) or Font pull-down then Appearance then
          Bold
           [type text]
           F6 (Bold) or Font pull-down then
          Appearance then Bold

B)Key Sequence--Boldfacing Existing Text(B

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight text]
           F6 (Bold) or Font pull-down then Appearance
          then Bold

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect allows you to enhance portions of text with
boldfacing by placing the text between a pair of Bold formatting
codes. Boldfacing is indicated on the screen by double-intensity
or a different color. When printing the boldfaced text, the
program will either select a bold version of the font in use or
doublestrike the text, depending upon the type of printer you
have.
     You can also boldface text by using Font (Ctrl-F8), selecting
the Appearance option and then selecting Bold, or by using the
Font or Edit pull-down menu.
     To remove boldfacing, locate either the [BOLD] or [bold] code
in the Reveal Codes screen and delete it. You only have to delete
one of the pair to delete both and remove the boldfacing.
     When the cursor is located on a boldfaced character in the
text, the number at the Pos indicator is shown in the same
attribute used by your monitor to display bold text (double-
intensity or a new color). As soon the cursor is moved ahead of or
behind the Bold code, this number returns to the normal attribute.
Thus, you can refer to the Pos indicator to locate a Bold code for
deletion without using the Reveal Codes screen.
     When you are about to delete a Bold code in this way (whether
intentionally or not), WordPerfect prompts you for confirmation.
Select Y for Yes to delete; if you simply press ─┘, the
boldfacing will remain.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Base Font
     Block Operations
     Cartridges and Fonts
     Font

A)Canceling a Command(A

     Terminates almost any WordPerfect command that is being
carried out.

B)Key Sequence(B

          F1 (Cancel) or [hold down one mouse button and click the
          other (on a two-button mouse)] or [click the middle
          mouse button (on a three-button mouse)]

B)Usage(B

     You can use F1 or the mouse buttons almost any time you wish
to cancel the command you have initiated. In certain cases, you
can press the Esc key two or more times to cancel a particular
command.
     To back out of a menu that you have selected, you can click
the right mouse button; it works like the F7 (Exit) key.
     When you have not initiated a WordPerfect command, the Cancel
key undeletes text. For more information about this use of Cancel,
see Undelete.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Esc Key
     Undelete

A)Cartridges and Fonts(A

     Allows you to select the fonts you want to use in the
document.

B)Key Sequence--Selecting Fonts(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Select Printer
           [highlight the printer that uses the fonts]
           Edit
           Cartridges and Fonts
           [highlight Cartridges or Soft Fonts]
           Select
           [mark fonts with * if they will be present when job
          begins or with + if WordPerfect must load them during
          print job]
           F7 (Exit) [five times]

B)Key Sequence--Designating Location of Soft Fonts(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Select Printer
           [highlight the printer that uses the fonts]
           Edit
           Path for Downloadable Fonts and Printer Command
          Files
           <drive/directory path> ─┘
           F7 (Exit) [three times]

B)Usage(B

     If your printer can use cartridges or soft fonts other than
those built into it, you need to select them before you can use
them in your documents. The Cartridges and Fonts menu will show
you the cartridges and print wheels that your printer supports and
the amount of memory available for downloading soft fonts. With
version 5.1, you will also see built-in fonts. In addition, font
families will be grouped together so that you can select them
easily. At the bottom of the screen, there are three options:

          1 Select; 2 Change Quantity; N Name search: 1

     If your laser printer has more than 512K of memory, select
the Change Quantity option. Enter the amount of additional memory
in kilobytes above the standard configuration for your printer
(512K for the LaserJet), plus the amount of memory available for
soft fonts, shown on the screen. For example, if you equip your
LaserJet with 1.5Mb of total memory (1Mb or 1024K additional),
enter 1374 for the quantity--1024K extra memory plus the 350K
currently available for soft fonts.
     To select cartridge fonts, be sure that the highlight cursor
is on "Cartridges" and then choose the Select option. Mark the
cartridges you wish to use by highlighting them and typing an
asterisk (*). Press Exit (F7) twice, and WordPerfect will update
the printer definition file.
       Move the highlight cursor to Soft Fonts and choose Select
Fonts to display a list of font groups. Select a group, and then
mark with an asterisk (*) all of the fonts that will be present
(that is, downloaded) before the print job begins. Mark all of the
fonts that will be downloaded during the print job with a plus
(+). To quickly locate the font you want to add from the list, use
Name Search by pressing F2 or N and typing the first few letters
of the font name. Press Exit (F7) three times, and WordPerfect
will update the printer definition file.
     If you have marked fonts that are to be downloaded by
WordPerfect during the print job, you must indicate the directory
that contains the fonts. Note that before printing you must
manually load any fonts marked with *, using the Initialize
Printer option on the Print menu, and then WordPerfect will
download them for you. To indicate this directory, select the Path
for Downloadable Fonts and Printer Command Files option and enter
the complete path name.
     The fonts you have selected will appear on the Base Font menu
and may be used in the document either by selecting a new base
font or by selecting a new size or appearance (see Base Font and
Font).
     To unmark fonts, repeat the procedure for editing the fonts
for the selected printer. If you marked a font with an asterisk
(*), highlight it again and type another * to unmark it. If you
marked the font with a plus (+), type + again to unmark it.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Base Font
     Bold
     Font
     Printer, Edit
     Printing Current Document

A)Case Conversion(A

     Converts a marked block of text to uppercase or lowercase
letters.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight text]
           Shift-F3 (Switch) then Uppercase; Lowercase
          or Edit pull-down then Convert Case then To
          Upper; To Lower

B)Usage(B

     To convert a block of text to all uppercase or all lowercase
letters, simply mark it as a block with the Block option and then
select Switch (Shift-F3) or Convert Case (from the Edit pull-down
menu). To convert the marked text, select Uppercase or Lowercase.
     Note that converting text to lowercase will not affect a
capital letter at the beginning of a sentence. For example,

          ...and John Smith. He...

becomes

          ...and john smith. He...

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Switch Document

A)Center(A

     Centers text on a line between the left and right margins.

B)Key Sequence--Centering Text As You Type It(B

          Shift-F6 (Center) or Layout pull-down then Align
          then Center
           <text to be centered> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Centering Existing Text(B

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight text to be centered]
           Shift-F6 (Center)
          or Layout pull-down then Align then Center
           [Just:Center]? No (Yes)

B)Usage(B

     To center text on a line between the left- and right-margin
settings, select Center, type the text, and press the Enter key.
To center text after it has been entered, mark the text (this can
include several lines) with Block, then select Center. WordPerfect
will prompt you. To center marked text, select Yes.
     To remove centering, locate either the [Center] or the
[Just:Center] code in the Reveal Codes screen and delete it.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Center Page (Top to Bottom)
     Flush Right
     Margins, Left and Right

A)Center Page (Top to Bottom)(A

     Centers text on a page between the top and bottom margins.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-Home Up Arrow
           Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Page
           Center Page (top to bottom) Y
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     Use the Center Page (Top to Bottom) command to print less
than an entire page of text centered vertically between your top
and bottom margins, as in title sheets of reports and papers.
     When using this command, position the cursor at the very top
of the page before entering the [Center Pg] code.
     To remove centering on the page, locate and delete the
[Center Pg] code in the Reveal Codes screen.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Center
     Margins, Top and Bottom

A)Codes(A

     Instructs the printer on how to format the text and graphics
in your document.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Alt-F3 (Reveal Codes) or Edit then Reveal Codes
           [view or edit codes and text in the Reveal Codes
          screen]
           Alt-F3 (Reveal Codes) or Edit then Reveal
          Codes

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect enters formatting codes into your document as you
use various commands. These codes are then sent to your printer
when you print the document. They instruct the printer on how to
accomplish various formatting changes in the document.
     Some codes, like those used to boldface and underline text,
are inserted in pairs, with one code turning on the effect and the
other one turning it off.
     WordPerfect keeps the formatting codes hidden from view on
the editing screen. To see them, you must press Reveal Codes (Alt-
F3), or select Reveal codes from the Edit pull-down menu. This
causes the program to split the screen into two windows. The lower
window shows the text with all of the codes inserted by
WordPerfect commands. WordPerfect indicates the position of the
cursor in the Reveal Codes screen by highlighting the code or
character. When using Reveal Codes, you can use all of the
standard WordPerfect editing features (including Undelete). When
you want the Reveal Codes screen to disappear, select Reveal Codes
a second time.
     In WordPerfect 5.1, you can adjust the size of this window,
which is normally 11 lines, by selecting Screen (Ctrl-F3) when the
Reveal Codes window is displayed and choosing Window, then
entering the number of lines you want it to have (the maximum
screen size is 24 lines). If you are using pull-down menus, choose
Edit and then Window.
     Most of the time, you use the Reveal Codes screen to locate
the position of a code that you wish to delete or change (you
can't always tell when the cursor is on a code just by looking at
the regular editing screen). To quickly locate the position of a
code, you can use WordPerfect's Search feature (see Search).
     You can prevent a formatting change that you have introduced
in the document by locating and deleting the code in the Reveal
Codes screen. If the cursor is located on the code, press the
Delete key to remove it. If the cursor is after the code, press
the Backspace key to remove it.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Deleting Text
     Hard Space
     Overstrike
     Printer Command
     Search
     Search and Replace

A)Columns, Text (Newspaper and Parallel)(A

     Allows you to format your text using either newspaper or
parallel columns.

B)Key Sequence--Defining Columns(B

     To define newspaper or parallel text columns:

          Alt-F7 (Columns/Table) or Layout pull-down
           Columns
           Define
           Type; Number of Columns; Distance Between Columns;
          Margins
           F7 (Exit)

B)Key Sequence--Turning Columns On and Off(B

     To turn text columns on and off in the document:

          Alt-F7 (Columns/Table) or Layout pull-down
           Columns
           On; Off

     Note: If you are using WordPerfect 5.0, the Alt-F7 key is
called Math/Columns. Column Define and Column On/Off are options
on the menu that appears when you press Alt-F7.

B)Usage--General(B

     WordPerfect can automatically format two different types of
text columns: newspaper (also called winding or snaking columns)
and parallel (or comparison) columns. Don't confuse either of
these with tabular columns, which are set simply by pressing Tab
to go the next tab stop. Newspaper columns are used with
continuous text (as in a newsletter), when it does not matter
where the material in the column ends, because the program wraps
the text to the top of the next column. Parallel columns are used
when the material consists of separate items that should remain
together on a page (as in scripts).
     Several basic steps are involved in using either type of text
column:

       1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the area to be
          formatted in columns, or anywhere before this point in
          the document.
       2. Define the columns.
       3. Turn on the columns.
       4. Enter the text for the columns.
       5. Turn off the columns.

     You can also use the Tables feature in WordPerfect 5.1 for
parallel columns (see Tables).

B)Usage--Defining the Columns(B

     The steps involved in defining newspaper and parallel columns
are similar:

       1. Select Columns/Table (Alt-F7) or use the Layout pull-
          down menu.
       2. Select Columns. (In version 5.0, select Column Def in
          place of steps 2 and 3.)
       3. Select the Define option.
       4. Select the Type option. WordPerfect displays the options

          Column Type: 1 Newspaper; 2 Parallel; 3 Parallel with
          Block Protect: 0

       5. Choose the appropriate column type.
       6. Select the Number option and enter the number of columns
          you want (the default is 2, and you can set up to 24
          columns).
       7. WordPerfect automatically calculates the distance
          between columns, depending upon the number and the
          margin settings. To override this distance, select the
          Distance Between Columns option and enter the distance
          you want to use.
       8. WordPerfect automatically calculates the left- and
          right-margin settings for the columns, depending upon
          the number of columns, the distance between them, and
          the margin settings. If you wish to have unequal col-
          umns, select the Margins option and the left- and right-
          margin settings for the column (or columns) you wish to
          change.
       9. Press Exit (F7) to save your column definition.

     When you define text columns, WordPerfect inserts a [Col
Def:...] code in your document.

B)Usage--Turning On the Columns(B

     After defining the columns, you are returned to the Columns
menu. If you wish to use your columns at the cursor's present
position, select the On option in version 5.1, or the Column
On/Off option in version 5.0. If you wish to use the columns
somewhere later on in the document, exit from this menu, move the
cursor to the place where you want your columns to begin, and then
return to this option. When you turn on columns, WordPerfect
inserts the code [Col On] in the document.
     You can't use the Column On/Off option on the Columns menu
until after you have defined your columns. If you have defined
several different columns in a document, WordPerfect will use the
one whose [Col Def:...] code immediately precedes the [Col On]
code.

B)Usage--Editing the Text Columns(B

     When typing or editing the text for your columns, you can use
most WordPerfect editing features. However, you can't sort, add
footnotes, or change the margin settings. In addition, movement
between columns is a little different in Column mode; these
techniques are summarized in the table below. The delete keys work
within a single column. This means that pressing Delete to the End
of Page (Ctrl-Page Down) deletes from the cursor to the end of the
column. If you have an advanced keyboard, Alt-Left Arrow and Alt-
Right Arrow move from column to column.

Cursor Movement in Column Mode:
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     KEY SEQUENCE             RESULT

     Ctrl-Home Right Arrow    Moves cursor between columns
     or Left Arrow

     Ctrl-Home Home           Moves to the first column
     Left Arrow

     Ctrl-Home Home           Moves to the last column
     Right Arrow

     Right Arrow              Moves to the first character of the
                              next column when the cursor is on
                              the last character in one column

     Left Arrow               Moves to the last character of the
                              previous column when the cursor is
                              on the first character in one
                              column

     Ctrl-Return              Ends a column and moves to the next
                              column; In a rightmost newspaper-
                              style column, also creates a page
                              break

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     Note: Other cursor control key sequences work as they do in
Editing mode and scroll all columns simultaneously.

     You can use Move (Ctrl-F4) to cut or copy a sentence or
paragraph in a single column. However, to cut or copy an entire
column (equivalent to a page), you must use Block (Alt-F4) with
Block Move or Copy. Do not try to use the Tabular Column option to
move a column, as a text column is not defined by tab stops and
can't be properly retrieved as a tabular column.

B)Usage--Editing Newspaper Columns(B

     When entering text in newspaper-style columns, WordPerfect
inserts a Soft Page code [SPg] when you reach the bottom margin of
the page and the cursor moves to the top of the next column. To
end a column before you reach the bottom margin, press Hard Page
(Ctrl-Enter) to insert a Hard Page code [HPg]. To shorten the
length of all newspaper columns on the page, increase the bottom
margin.

B)Usage--Editing Parallel Columns(B

     When entering text in parallel columns, press Hard Page
(Ctrl-Enter) to move to the next column across. When you press
Hard Page after entering the text for the last column, the cursor
returns to the beginning of the first column. If you are using
parallel columns without block protection, the codes

          [Col Off]; [HRt]; [Col On]

are inserted into the document at this point. If you are using
parallel columns with block protection, the codes

          [BlockPro:Off][Col Off]; [Hrt]; [BlockPro:On][Col On]

are inserted into the document. All items between the
[BlockPro:On] and [BlockPro:Off] codes are kept together on a
page. If the material will be split across pages by a soft page
break [SPg], WordPerfect will move it all to the next page.

B)Usage--Turning Off the Columns(B

     When you are finished entering your columns and wish to
return to the normal format of your document, you need to turn
off the columns. To do this, press Columns/Table (Alt-F7), then
select the Columns option, and select Off. WordPerfect inserts a
[Col Off] code in your document at the cursor's position.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Block Protect
     Cursor Movement
     Graphics
     Headers and Footers
     Indexes
     Justification
     Page Break, Soft and Hard
     Tabs
     Tables

A)Compose(A

     Allows you to create digraphs and diacriticals or select a
special symbol or character from one of WordPerfect's character
sets.

B)Key Sequence--Creating a Digraph or Diacritical(B

          Ctrl-2 (Compose) or Font pull-down then
          Characters
           <first character> <second character>

B)Key Sequence--Selecting Special Characters(B

          Ctrl-2 (Compose) or Font pull-down then
          Characters
           <character set number>, <character number> ─┘

B)Usage(B

     You can use Compose (Ctrl-2) to create digraphs such as æ or
diacriticals such as é or ñ. To produce such characters, press
Compose (Ctrl-2) or choose Characters from the Font menu, and then
enter the two characters that make up the special character. (The
order in which the characters are entered doesn't matter.) If you
type the a and e, for example, æ will appear at the cursor's
position. However, the fact that you can create these special
characters on your screen doesn't mean that your printer can
reproduce them. This depends upon the printer and fonts that you
are using.
     You can also use Compose to produce specific characters in
one of the many characters sets created by WordPerfect. Each set
is assigned a number, as is each character in that set. To view
the character sets, you need to retrieve the document CHARACTR.DOC
on the Conversion disk. You can also retrieve the document
CHARMAP.TST to see which of these characters your printer can
produce.
     To enter a character from one of these sets, first press
Compose (Ctrl-2) or select characters from the Font pull-down
menu. Enter the number of the character set, type a comma, and
enter the number of the character in that set. Then press ─┘. For
example, to enter the ½ symbol, which is character 17 of character
set 4, you press Compose (Ctrl-2), then enter 4,17 and press ─┘.
If your printer can't produce the character you entered with
Compose, you will see a solid rectangle instead of the desired
character in your document. If your printer can print graphics,
WordPerfect 5.1 will create that character for it.
     WordPerfect doesn't enter any codes when you type a special
character with Compose. Therefore, to remove the character, simply
delete it as you would any other character in the document.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Equations (Version 5.1)
     Font
     Line Draw
     Overstrike

A)Conditional End of Page(A

     Ensures that a specific number of lines of text remain
together on a page.

B)Key Sequence(B

          [move the cursor to the line above the lines that you
          want to keep together]
           Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Other
           Conditional End of Page
           <number of lines> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     The Conditional End of Page command is used to keep a group
of lines together on a page. Once the group of lines is marked, if
subsequent changes to an earlier part of the document result in a
soft page break within the block, WordPerfect will move the entire
block to the beginning of the next page (resulting in a shorter
previous page).
     To use the Conditional End of Page command, you must first
count the number of lines you want to keep together and locate the
cursor somewhere on the line above the group. Then, follow the key
sequence. To remove the conditional end of page, locate the [Cndl
EOP] code in the Reveal Codes screen and delete it.

     Note: You can also use Block Protect to accomplish the same
thing. When you use this command, you don't have to know the
number of lines involved, as you indicate the text to stay on a
page by marking it as a block.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Protect
     Page Break, Soft and Hard
     Widow/Orphan Protection

A)Copying Files(A

     Allows you to copy files between disks and directories from
within WordPerfect.

B)Key Sequence--Copying a Single File(B

          F5 (List Files) ─┘ or File pull-down then List
          Files
           [highlight file]
           Copy
           Copy this file to:  <drive letter/path name> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Copying Multiple Files(B

          F5 (List Files) ─┘
           [type * before each file to be copied]
           Copy
           Copy marked files? No (Yes)
           Copy all marked files to:  <drive letter/path name>
          ─┘

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect allows you to copy files to a new disk or
directory from the List Files menu. To copy a single file,
highlight the name on the List Files screen and select the Copy
option. WordPerfect will display the prompt "Copy this file to:."
Enter the drive letter (as in B:) if you want to copy the file to
a new disk. Enter the entire path name (as in C:\WP\LTRS) if you
want to copy it to a new directory.
     To copy multiple files at one time, mark each file by
highlighting it and typing an asterisk (*). To copy all of the
files in the list, press Alt-F5 and select the Copy option. When
you are prompted, choose Yes. Designate the drive/directory for
these copies in response to the prompt "Copy all marked files to:"
and press ─┘.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Append Block
     Directories
     List Files
     Move/Rename Files

A)Cross-Reference (5.1) or Automatic Reference (5.0)(A

     Allows you to mark references in the document to a figure,
table, footnote, or page; automatically updates them.

B)Key Sequence--Marking Reference and Target(B

     To mark both the reference and target (first move to the
place where the reference is to appear):

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Cross-Ref
           Mark Both Reference and Target
           Page Number; Paragraph/Outline Number; Footnote
          Number; Endnote Number; Graphics Box Number
           [position cursor immediately after the target] ─┘
           <target name> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Marking Only the Reference(B

     To mark only the reference (first move to the place where the
reference is to appear):

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Cross-Ref
           Mark Reference
           Page Number; Paragraph/Outline Number; Footnote
          Number; Endnote Number; Graphics Box Number
           <target name> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Marking Only the Target(B

     To mark only the target (first position the cursor
immediately after the target):

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Cross-Ref
           Mark Target
           <target name> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Generating Cross-References(B

     To generate the cross-references (you will need to do this
any time a reference is affected by editing the document):

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Generate
           Generate Tables, Indexes, Cross-References, etc.
           Existing tables, lists, and indexes will be
          replaced. Continue? Yes (No) ─┘

B)Usage(B

     The Cross-Reference feature, called Automatic Reference in
version 5.0, maintains and automatically updates references to
areas of text, footnotes, endnotes, graphics boxes, or equation
boxes (Version 5.1). The place in the document where the reference
number will appear when the document is printed is the reference.
The place in the document that contains the text referred to is
the target.
     You can mark the reference and target at the same time except
when referencing a graphics box caption. In this case, you must
mark the reference and the target separately. When you mark a
reference only, a question mark appears in place of the reference
number. This question mark is replaced with the actual figure,
note, or page number when you generate the references.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Equations (Version 5.1)
     Footnotes and Endnotes
     Graphics
     Mark Text
     Master Document
     Page Numbering
     Tables
     Tables of Contents

A)Cursor Movement(A

     WordPerfect has many key combinations that move the cursor
through a document. However, you can only use these techniques to
move through existing text or codes. WordPerfect will not allow
you to move the cursor beyond the last text character or
formatting code. The following table shows the different cursor-
movement methods available in WordPerfect.

Cursor Movement Techniques:
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     TO MOVE                                 KEY SEQUENCE

     Character by character                  Left Arrow or Right
                                             Arrow
     Word by word                            Ctrl-Left Arrow or
                                             Ctrl-Right Arrow
     To the beginning of a line              Home Left Arrow
     To the end of a line                    Home Right Arrow
     To the end of a sentence                Ctrl-Home
     To the next occurrence of a character   Ctrl-Home character
     To the top of the screen                Home Up Arrow or -
                                             (minus)
     To subsequent screens repeatedly        Home Down Arrow or +
                                             (plus)
     To the previous page                    PgUp
     To the next page                        PgDn
     To the top of the page                  Ctrl-Home Up Arrow
     To the bottom of the page               Ctrl-Home Down Arrow
     To a specified page                     Ctrl-Home <page
                                             number> ─┘
     To the last cursor position before the  Ctrl-Home Ctrl-Home
     cursor movement command
     To the beginning of the last defined    Ctrl-Home Alt-F4
     block
     To the beginning of the document        Home Home Up Arrow
     To the end of the document              Home Home Down Arrow

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

B)Usage--Positioning the Cursor with the Mouse(B

     If you are using a mouse, simply click with the left mouse
button at the point where you want to position the cursor. If you
have split the screen, you can use the mouse in either window. You
can also use it to position the cursor in prompts that ask for
input from the keyboard.
     If you need to see parts of your document that are not
visible on the screen, you can use the mouse to scroll to them.
Press the right mouse button and then drag the mouse to the edge
of the screen in the direction you want to scroll (right, left,
up, or down). To stop scrolling, release the mouse button. To
block text and scroll at the same time, use the left mouse button.
     You can also use the mouse to select WordPerfect commands and
features (see Mouse).

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Columns, Text (Newspaper and Parallel)
     Esc Key
     Function Keys
     Go To
     Macros
     Mouse (Version 5.1)

A)Cut and Copy Text(A

     Allows you to move or copy text within a document or between
two documents.

B)Key Sequence--Copying a Sentence, Paragraph, or Page(B

     To move or copy a sentence, paragraph, or page:

          Ctrl-F4 (Move) or Edit pull-down then Select
           Sentence; Paragraph; Page
           Move; Copy
           [move cursor to place where text is to be moved or
          copied] ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Copying a Block, Column, or Rectangle(B

     To move or copy a marked block, column, or rectangle

           Ctrl-F4 (Move) then Block; Tabular Column; Rectangle
          then Move; Copy
          or Edit pull-down then Move (Cut); Copy
           [move cursor to place where text is to be moved or
          copied] ─┘

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect provides two methods for moving (cutting) or
copying text, with or without using a mouse (Version 5.1). In
addition, if you have an enhanced keyboard, version 5.1 provides
keyboard shortcuts for these operations. When you move text, it is
cut from its original position and relocated in the new position
you indicate. When you copy text, it remains in its original
position and is copied to the new position you indicate. To move
or copy text between document windows, press Switch (Shift-F3)
before pressing ─┘ to retrieve the text. To be able to press ─┘
without inserting the copied or moved text, press F1 (Cancel);
then to retrieve the text where you want it, press Shift-F10 ─┘.
     If you want to move or copy a tabular column, a rectangle, or
any block that is not an entire sentence, paragraph, or page, you
need to mark the block before you move or copy it.
     Text that has been moved or copied remains in a special place
in the computer's memory (known as a buffer) even after it has
been retrieved the first time. To retrieve another copy of the
text elsewhere in the document, take these steps:

       1. Relocate the cursor to the place where you want the
          second copy to appear.
       2. Press Move (Ctrl-F4). If you are using pull-down menus,
          select Paste from the Edit menu.
       3. Select Retrieve.
       4. Select the appropriate option: Block (use this option
          even if you cut or copied an entire sentence,
          paragraph, or page); Tabular Column; or Rectangle.

     You can also retrieve text by pressing Retrieve (Shift-F10)
and then the ─┘ key.
     With WordPerfect 5.1, you can use keyboard shortcuts for
moving and copying text on some keyboards. Block the text; then
press Ctrl-Delete to move it or Ctrl-Ins to copy it.

B)Usage--Marking a Tabular Column(B

     To mark a tabular column for moving or copying, you must
separate each column by at least one tab stop. Move the cursor to
the first tab stop in the first line of the column. Press Block
(Alt-F4), then move the cursor to the beginning of the column in
the last line. Then press Move (Ctrl-F4) and select the Tabular
Column option. WordPerfect will highlight just the column. With a
mouse, highlight to the end of the column (more will be
highlighted than you want, but don't worry); then choose Select
from the Edit menu. Tabular Column will be selected for you, so
just press ─┘.  Finally, choose either Copy or Move and complete
the procedure by moving the cursor to the column's new position
and pressing ─┘.

B)Usage--Marking a Rectangle(B

     A rectangular block is marked for moving or copying from
corner to corner. To mark a rectangle, position the cursor at one
corner--either the upper left or the lower right--and press Block
(Alt-F4). Then move the cursor to the opposite corner and press
Move (Ctrl-F4). (A regular text block will be highlighted until
you choose Rectangle.) Select Rectangle, choose either Copy or
Move, and complete the procedure by moving the cursor to the
rectangle's new position and pressing ─┘. You can also use the
mouse to highlight the block.
     To abandon the move or copy operation that you have
initiated, press Cancel (F1). If the marked block disappears from
your editing screen when you use Cancel, press Move (Ctrl-F4) and
select the Retrieve and Block (or Column or Rectangle) options to
have it reappear in its original position.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Append Block
     Block Operations
     Deleting Text

A)Date, Inserting the(A

     Inserts the current date either as text or as a function that
is updated when the document is retrieved or printed.

B)Key Sequence--Entering the Date Text or Date Code(B

          Shift-F5 (Date/Outline) or Tools pull-down
           Date Text; Date Code

B)Key Sequence--Changing the Date Format(B

          Shift-F5 (Date/Outline) or Tools pull-down
           Date Format
           <date format codes> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     You can use the Date Text and Date Code options to insert the
current date and/or time in your document. If you select the Date
Text option, the date is entered as text and doesn't change. If
you select Date Code, the date is entered as a function code that
is updated whenever you retrieve or print the document. You can
format the date in a variety of ways by using the Date Format
option.
     To insert the current date or time during a merge, use the
{DATE} merge code (see Merge Codes).
     To remove the date inserted as text, delete it as you would
any text in WordPerfect. To remove the Date code, locate and
delete the [Date] code in the Reveal Codes screen.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Merge Operations
     Merge Codes

A)Decimal/Align Character(A

     Allows you to enter a new character for the decimal point
(and tab alignment character) and thousands' separator.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Other
           Decimal/Align Character <character> ─┘ Thousands'
          Separator <character> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect uses the period as the decimal and alignment
character and the comma as the thousands' separator. To change
these, follow the key sequence. A change to the decimal/align
character affects how Tab Align and totals calculated with the
Math feature work.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Indent
     Indent
     Math
     Tab Align
     Tabs

A)Deleting Files(A

     Allows you to delete files from within WordPerfect without
having to exit to DOS.

B)Key Sequence--Deleting a Single File(B

     To delete a single file in the current directory:

          F5 (List Files) ─┘ or File pull-down then List Files
           [highlight file name]
           Delete
           Delete <file name>? No (Yes)

B)Key Sequence--Deleting Several Files(B

     To delete several files in the current directory at one time:

          F5 (List Files) ─┘ or File pull-down then List Files
           [Enter * before each file to be deleted]
           Delete
           Delete marked files? No (Yes)

B)Usage(B

     By using the Delete option on the List Files menu, you can
delete unneeded document files from within WordPerfect without
having to use the DOS delete commands.
     To delete a document from the List Files menu, press F5 (or
choose List Files from the File pull-down menu) and enter a new
drive/directory if the files aren't in the current directory;
otherwise, just press ─┘. Move the highlight cursor to the file
to be deleted.
     If you want to delete several files, mark each one by typing
an asterisk (*) by its name. In WordPerfect 5.1, you can mark all
the files in a directory with an asterisk by pressing Mark Text
(Alt-F5); pressing Alt-F5 a second time will unmark all of the
files. Then select the Delete option and confirm the deletion by
selecting Yes.
     You can't restore a deleted file in WordPerfect as you can
deleted text. Therefore, use the Delete option on List Files with
care. If you do delete a file in error, turn to DOS utilities such
as Norton Utilities or Mace Utilities to restore the file.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Directories
     List Files
     Mark Text

A)Deleting Text(A

     WordPerfect includes a wide variety of methods for deleting
text in the document. All methods are summarized in the followng
table.

Cut and Copy Text:
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     TO DELETE                     PRESS
     Character by character        Backspace (deletes to left of
                                   cursor); Del (deletes character
                                   or space the cursor is on)
     Word by word                  Ctrl-Backspace
     Several words                 Esc n (n = number of words to
                                   left of the cursor) Ctrl-
                                   Backspace
     The word to the left of       Ctrl-Left Arrow Ctrl-Backspace
     the cursor
     The word to the right of      Ctrl-Right Arrow Ctrl-Backspace
     the cursor
     From the cursor left to       Home Backspace
     the beginning of a word
     From the cursor right to      Home Del
     the end of a word
     To the end of a line          Ctrl-End
     To the end of a page          Ctrl-PgDn
     A sentence                    Ctrl-F4 S D or Edit then Select
                                   then Sentence then Delete
     A paragraph                   Ctrl-F4 P D or Edit then Select
                                   then Paragraph then Delete
     A page                        Ctrl-F4 A D or Edit then Select
                                   then Page then Delete
     A marked block                Alt-F4 Backspace or Del Y or
                                   Edit then Delete then Yes
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     To restore the text you just deleted, press Cancel (F1) and
select the Restore option. With pull-down menus, select Undelete
from the Edit menu.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Codes
     Cut and Copy Text
     Undelete

A)Directories(A

     Allows you to create and delete directories from within
WordPerfect and to change the current (or default) directory.

B)Key Sequence--Creating a New Directory(B

          F5 (List Files) or File pull-down then List Files
           = or ─┘ then Other Directory
           <drive/directory path name> ─┘
           Create <drive/directory path name>? No (Yes)

B)Key Sequence--Making a Directory Current(B

     To make an existing directory current (the default):

          F5 (List Files) or File pull-down then List Files
           = or ─┘ then Other Directory
           New directory = <drive/directory path name> ─┘
           Cancel (F1) to return to screen

B)Key Sequence--Deleting a Directory(B

     To delete a directory (after removing all its files):

          F5 (List Files) ─┘
          or File pull-down then List Files ─┘
           [highlight directory name]
           Delete
           Delete <drive/directory path name>? No (Yes)

B)Key Sequence--Assigning a Descriptive Alias(B

     To give a directory a descriptive alias:

          [enter existing directory path name]
           F9 (End Field)
           [enter descriptive alias]
           F9 (End Field)
           Shift-F9 (Merge Codes)
           End Record
           F10 (Save) ─┘ or File pull-down then Save
           \WP{WP}.DLN ─┘

B)Usage--General(B

     WordPerfect allows you to manage your document files by
saving them in different directories. Usually, the directories
that contain your documents are organized as subdirectories of the
WordPerfect directory (such as C:\WP\FILES) that contains the
WordPerfect program files. You can create and remove such
directories from within WordPerfect instead of resorting to the
DOS Make Directory (md) command. However, WordPerfect won't let
you delete any directory until you have removed all of the files
within it (see Deleting Files).

B)Usage--Creating Directories(B

     To create a new directory, perform the procedure to change
directories (outlined in the key sequence). When WordPerfect finds
that the directory doesn't exist, it prompts you to create it. If
you type Y for Yes, the program creates the directory for you.
     When entering the path name for the directory, begin with the
drive letter and a colon (such as B:, C:, or D:) if it is on
another drive, and then list all of the directories in the
hierarchy, separated by a backslash (\). If the directory is on
the same disk, you need only enter the directory names separated
by backslashes.

B)Usage--Using Directory Aliases(B

     In versions of WordPerfect prior to 5.1, you were restricted
to the DOS naming conventions (eight characters plus an optional
three-character extension) when naming directories. In WordPerfect
5.1, you can give a directory a more descriptive name of up to 30
characters, called an alias. The alias will be displayed when you
have the Long Display option on in the List Files screen (see List
Files).
     To create a directory alias, in a blank editing screen type
the full DOS path name of the existing directory. Then press F9
and type the descriptive alias name. Press Shift-F9 (Merge Codes)
and select End Record. An example on your screen should look like
this:

          C:\WP51\LOTUS{END FIELD}
          OCTOBER SPREADSHEETS{END FIELD}
          {END RECORD}

From then on, the directory named LOTUS will appear as OCTOBER
SPREADSHEETS when you display the List Files screen and the Long
Display option is on.
     You can give any of your existing directories aliases by
repeating this procedure for each of them. When you have finished
assigning aliases, save the file as WP{WP}.DLN in your root
directory (C:). Whenever you want to assign aliases to other
directories, you can retrieve this file, edit it to assign the new
aliases, and save it.

B)Usage--Changing Directories(B

     You can change the current (or default) directory in
WordPerfect using List Files (F5) from either the editing screen
or the List Files menu. To change the directory from the editing
screen, press List Files (F5) (or select List Files from the File
pull-down menu) and type =. Then enter the new drive/directory
path in response to the "New directory =" prompt and press ─┘.
Edit the current path name displayed after this prompt, or retype
it from scratch.
     WordPerfect responds by showing you the new default
directory, terminated by *.* (the global wildcards for listing all
files in the directory). To return to the editing screen, press
Cancel (F1). To obtain a listing of all of the files in the new
default directory, press ─┘.
     If you don't know the name of the default directory or where
it is located on the path, you can change the directory using the
Other Directory option on the List Files menu. To view aliases you
have assigned if the List Files screen is not showing the long
display, select the Short/Long Display option and choose Long
Display. If the name of the desired directory appears at the top
of the list, move the highlight cursor to it. If it is located on
a level above that of the current directory, highlight ".. Parent
<Dir>" and press ─┘ twice. Then locate and highlight the
directory name on the new list. If the desired directory is a
subdirectory of one shown on the list, highlight that directory
and press ─┘ twice (or double-click on the directory and press
─┘ or the right mouse button), then move the highlight cursor to
its name on the new list. Select the Other Directory option, and
WordPerfect will supply the path to the highlighted directory as
the new directory to change to; to accept it, press ─┘. To return
to the editing screen, press Cancel (F1) twice. To obtain a
directory listing of all the files in the new default directory,
press ─┘.

B)Usage--Deleting Directories(B

     To delete a directory, first make sure that there are no
files in it. You can do this by changing to the directory and
listing the files as outlined above. With the highlight cursor on
the directory name, select the Delete option on the List Files
menu (F5 ─┘) and answer Yes to the prompt to delete the
directory.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Copying Files
     Deleting Files
     List Files
     Macros
     Move/Rename File
     Printing from List Files
     Short/Long Document Names (Version 5.1)

A)Display Pitch(A

     Adjusts the amount of space that one character occupies on
the display screen.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Document
           Display Pitch Automatic Y or N <width> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect displays all characters on the screen in a mono-
spaced pitch of 10 characters per inch, regardless of what font
you are using. Sometimes, when you're setting up complex tables or
using the Advance feature, some characters will overlap and
therefore not be visible on the screen. To help you see the
spacing between characters, you can change the display pitch on
the Document menu, accessed from Format (Shift-F8).
     Two options are attached to Display Pitch: Automatic, which
is set to Yes or No, and Width, which allows you to enter a
measurement for increasing or decreasing the display pitch. When
Automatic is set to Yes, you cannot change the display pitch. If
you set Automatic to No, you can change it from the default
setting of 0.1".
     You can change the display pitch from anywhere in the
document; the new pitch affects the entire document. To return the
document to the normal display width of one-tenth inch, return to
the Display Pitch option and enter Y for the Auto setting and .1
as the Width measurement.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Advance
     Tables

A)Document Comments(A

     Places nonprinting comments in your document.

B)Key Sequence--Manipulating Comments(B

     To create or edit a comment or convert a comment to text:

          Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out) then Comment or Edit pull-down
          then Comment
           Create; Edit; Convert to Text

B)Key Sequence--Converting Text to a Comment(B

          Alt-F4 (Block)
           [highlight text to be placed in comment]
           Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out) or Edit pull-down then Comment
          then Create
           Create a comment? No (Yes)

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect allows you to enter nonprinting comments anywhere
in the text of your document. You can use these comments can be
used as reminders of editing changes that still remain to be done.
You can use the Search feature to quickly locate comments in the
text, because WordPerfect inserts the code [Comment] in the
document when you create a comment (see Search).
     On the editing screen, the text entered as a comment is
displayed within a double-lined box. If you create the comment in
the middle of a line, the comment box will split the sentence on
different lines, although the cursor will bypass the comment box
when moving from the part of the sentence before the comment to
the part after it.
     WordPerfect allows you to convert the text entered into a
comment box into document text, which will be printed. To do this,
you follow the procedure for editing a comment except that you
select the Convert to Text option on the Comment menu. The box
surrounding the comment disappears, and WordPerfect reformats the
text as required.
     You can also convert document text to comment text, so that
it is no longer part of the document, nor is it printed. First,
block the text to be converted, then select Edit and Comment. When
you do this, a prompt will appear. When you select Yes, the text
will be enclosed in a comment box.
     To remove a comment from the document, locate and delete the
[Comment] code in the Reveal Codes screen.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Document Summary
     Search

A)Document Compare(A

     Compares the copy of your document on the editing screen with
the disk version, and marks the differences.

B)Key Sequence--Comparing Screen and Disk Versions(B

     To compare a document on screen with a document on disk:

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Generate
           Compare Screen and Disk Document and Add Redline and
          Strikeout
           Other Document: <file name> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Removing Redline/Strikeout(B

     To remove all redline markings and strikeout text added when
using Document Compare:

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Generate
           Remove Redline Markings and Strikeout Text from
          Document
           Delete redline markings and strikeout text? No (Yes)

     Note: You can also choose Document Compare from the Mark
pull-down menu; then choose Add Markings or Remove Markings.

B)Usage(B

     The Document Compare feature checks the document on the
editing screen against any version of the document on disk. It
compares only phrases in the two documents, and it automatically
indicates any discrepancies between the two by marking the
document on your screen. WordPerfect considers a phrase to be any
text between markers, including any punctuation marks, hard
returns, hard page breaks, Footnote and Endnote codes, and the end
of the document.
     If phrases that don't exist in the disk version have been
added to the document on screen, WordPerfect redlines the text in
the screen version. If phrases that still exist in the disk
version no longer exist in the document on screen, the program
marks the text with strikeout. If phrases have been moved in the
document on screen from their position in the disk version,
WordPerfect inserts "THE FOLLOWING TEXT WAS MOVED" on a line
before the text and "THE PRECEDING TEXT WAS MOVED" on a line after
the text. These messages are displayed in strikeout, and the text
between them may be displayed in either redline or strikeout,
depending on the version in which it exists.
     After running the Document Compare procedure as outlined in
the key sequence, you can locate the Redline codes and strikeout
text by using the Search feature (see Search). After examining the
changes, you can remove all Redline and Strikeout codes, as
indicated in the key sequence.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Mark Text
     Redline/Strikeout
     Search

A)Document Summary(A

     Enables you to add a nonprinting summary to your document.

B)Key Sequence--Creating a Document Summary(B

     To create or edit a document summary:

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Document
           Summary
           Creation Date; Document Name; Document Type;
          Author/Typist; Subject; Account;
          Keywords; Abstract
           F7 (Exit)

B)Key Sequence--Setting Defaults(B

     To create a document summary on Save/Exit or set document
summary defaults:

          Shift-F1 (Setup) or File pull-down then Setup
           Environment
           Document Management/Summary
           Create Summary on Save/Exit No (Yes); Subject Search
          Text; Long Document Names No (Yes); Default Document
          Type
           F7 (Exit)

     Note: Several new options for the document summary feature
were added to version 5.1. If you are using version 5.0, after you
choose Document and then Summary, your choices will be Descriptive
Filename; Subject/Account; Author; Typist; and Comments.

B)Usage--General(B

     You can add a document summary to any document that you
create in WordPerfect. The document summary can be added or edited
from any place within the document.
     A document summary does not produce a code in your document,
and with versions of WordPerfect prior to 5.1, there was no way to
delete a document summary once it was created. With version 5.1,
you can delete a document summary by pressing Delete and typing Y
in response to the prompt when the cursor is on the status line in
the Document Summary menu.
     The document summary can include the following statistics on
the document (note that WordPerfect enters the first two
automatically, and you enter the rest):

       ■  The date the document was created (WordPerfect uses the
          current date as supplied by DOS). You can change this
          date by using the Creation Date option. In addition, the
          summary displays the date of the latest revision.
       ■  The long document name (see Short/Long Document Names),
          which can contain up to 68 characters, and a document
          type, which can be up to 20 characters (see below). If
          you have already assigned this document a long document
          name using List Files (see List Files), it will be
          displayed here, where you can edit it with the Document
          Name option.
       ■  The author and/or typist, which can include up to 60
          characters.
       ■  The subject, which you can type in (up to 160
          characters) or retrieve from a RE: heading in your
          document (see below).
       ■  The account, which can be a number or any other
          information that will help you categorize the document.
       ■  Any keywords that you want to use to identify the
          document. In List Files, you can use those keywords to
          help you locate the file or group of related files with
          the same keyword (see List Files).
       ■  An abstract, which can be up to 780 characters. You can
          type in a summary of the document here, or press
          Retrieve (Shift-F10) to retrieve its first 400
          characters.

     Three items can be automatically retrieved from other
locations in your document. When the cursor is on the status line
in the Document Summary screen, you can press Shift-F10 (Retrieve)
to retrieve (1) the most recent author and typist entries you have
saved on any other document's document summary during your current
session with WordPerfect, (2) the first 39 characters following
the first RE: in your document (you can change this search string;
see below), and (3) the document's first 400 characters, which
will appear as the Abstract entry. All three of these items will
be located and retrieved if they exist; you can't choose a
combination of them.

B)Usage--Setting Default Document Summary Options(B

The Document Management/Summary options on the Setup menu allow
you to set defaults to use with your document summaries. You can
have WordPerfect automatically prompt you to create a summary the
first time you save each document by setting the Create Summary on
Save/Exit option to Yes.
     The characters RE: are the default Subject Search Text, but
you can change them to another subject heading, such as SUBJECT:,
by using the Subject Search Text option.
     You can also specify with the Long Document Names option
whether you want to use a long document name (up to 30 characters,
including spaces) when you save each document. If you set this
option to Yes, WordPerfect will prompt you to enter the long
document name, the document type (see below), and the DOS file
name for the document each time you save it.
     The Default Document Type option allows you to enter text
that will be suggested as the Document Type when you save the
document, assuming you are using long document names. In addition,
WordPerfect will suggest the first three characters of this
document type as an extension when you save the document, so you
can use this option to group related documents together, such as
memos, letters, or chapters of different books.

B)Usage--Saving, Appending, and Printing Summaries(B

     You can save a document summary as a separate file, or append
it to an existing file. When the Document Summary menu is on the
screen and the cursor is on the status line, press Save (F10) and
enter a new or existing file name. If the file has already been
created, you will be asked whether to replace its contents with
the text of the document summary or append it to the end of the
file.
     To print a document summary, press Shift-F7 (Print) while the
summary is displayed on your screen. In addition, if you are
printing selected pages of a document (see Printing Current
Document), you can type s to print the document summary.
     If you are using the Look option in the List Files screen
(F5), you can also save and print document summaries from there
(see List Files).

B)Usage--Locating a File Using Its Document Summary(B

     When you use the Look option on the List Files menu (F5 ─┘)
to view the contents of a document that contains a document
summary, the summary statistics are always the first text
displayed on the screen. You can also use the Find option (called
Word Search in version 5.0) on the List Files menu to locate a
file according to particular statistics in the document summary.
     If you want to restrict the search to one specific word or
word pattern that is in your document summaries, use the Document
Summary option (see Find for the types of patterns you can enter).
Use the First Pg option to search just the first pages (or the
first 4000 characters, whichever occurs first) of each document.
To search the entire document, select Entire Doc. Select
Conditions to limit the search to a specific item within your
document summaries, such as the author of the document or its date
of creation. (See Find.)

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Document Comments
     Find
     List Files
     Printing Current Document
     Printing a Document on Disk
     Short/Long Document Names (Version 5.1)

A)Equations (Version 5.1)(A

     In version 5.1, you can create mathematical equations.

B)Key Sequence--Creating an Equation(B

          Alt-F9 (Graphics) or Graphics pull-down
           Equation
           Create
           Edit
           [compose equation by typing or choosing from
          equation palette]
           F7 (Exit) twice

B)Key Sequence--Editing an Equation(B

     To edit an existing equation in your document:

          Alt-F9 (Graphics) or Graphics pull-down
           Equation
           Edit
           [enter equation number]
           Edit
           [recompose equation]
           F7 (Exit) twice

B)Key Sequence--Retrieving an Equation File(B

     To retrieve an existing equation file for editing:

          Alt-F9 (Graphics) or Graphics pull-down
           Equation
           Create
           Edit
           Shift-F10 (Retrieve) [enter file name] ─┘ or F5
          [enter directory name to view files] ─┘ [highlight
          file] then Retrieve

B)Key Sequence(B

     To save an equation as a separate file (while you are in the
equation editor):

          Shift-F10 (Save) [enter file name for equation] ─┘


B)Usage--General(B

     To create an equation, first define a graphics box as an
equation box and then use the WordPerfect 5.1 equation editor to
create your equation. As you enter the commands and keywords for
your equation in the lower part of the window, the equation editor
displays it graphically in the upper window so that you can see it
as you compose it.
     To create an equation, follow these steps:

       1. Press Alt-F9 (Graphics) and select Equation, or select
          Equation from the Graphics menu.
       2. Select Create.
       3. Select Edit to display the equation editor.
       4. Create your equation in any combination of the following
          ways:

       ■  By typing in the equation editing window (the lower part
          of the screen). You can enter numbers, letters, and
          symbols from the keyboard. Certain keys have special
          meanings in the equation editor, and WordPerfect
          recognizes many keywords as commands (see the Equation
          Palette appendix in your user guide for a complete list
          of these). You can also compose characters by using the
          Compose feature (see Compose).
       ■  By pressing F5 (List) or choosing List Commands to move
          to the equation palette (a series of menus similar to
          those found in the macro editor) and choosing symbols,
          commands, and variables from the items it presents.
          Select items with the mouse or the highlight cursor, and
          then press ─┘. After each selection, you are moved back
          to the equation editing window.

       5. Press Ctrl-F3 (Screen) or choose Screen Redisplay to
          view your equation in the display window (the upper part
          of the screen). To return to the equation editing
          window, press Shift-F3 or choose Screen Redisplay again.
       6. Press F7 (Exit) to return to the equation definition
          screen.

     In the equation editing window, you can delete characters by
using the Backspace and Delete keys. To delete from the cursor to
the end of the equation, press Ctrl-PgDn and respond Yes to the
"Delete Remainder of Page?" prompt.
     The equation you see in the equation display window is
normally larger than it will appear when printed (the percentage
of magnification appears in the lower right corner). You can move
and resize the equation, in the display window only, by using the
arrow, PgUp, and PgDn keys. By resizing, you can check small
symbols that may be used as superscripts and subscripts, for
example. Press Ctrl-Home (Go To) to reset any changes you make to
the display. You can also move the equation around with the arrow
keys, use PgUp/PgDn Scale to resize the equation, and use GoTo
Reset to reset the equation display from the menu at the bottom of
the screen, when you switch to the display window.
     When you are in the display window, a double line appears at
its right, and you cannot use the cursor in the editing window.
When you return to the editing window, the double line moves to
its right.

B)Usage--Saving an Equation as a Separate File(B

     You can save an equation separately from the document it
appears in. You may want to do this, for example, if you plan to
use an equation in several documents. To save an equation, press
F10 (Save) while you are in the equation editor; then enter a name
(a path name if you want to save it in a different directory) and
press ─┘.
     To retrieve a saved equation, press Shift-F10 (Retrieve)
while you are in the equation editor; then enter the name of the
equation. You can also press F5 (List Files) and enter a directory
name to display the files in a directory. Pressing F5 twice will
display the contents of the current directory. In addition, you
can enter an equation's name at the Filename heading on the
Definition: Equation menu, and WordPerfect will retrieve the
equation.

B)Usage--Printing Equations(B

     Equations are printed in the base font you have selected
unless you change the font within the equation box. You can also
change the size (Small, Large, and so on) and appearance (bold,
italic, and so on) of the font within the equation box. Variables
(alphabetic characters) will automatically be printed in italics.
Subscripts and superscripts will automatically be printed as
subscripts and superscripts.
     The program creates all equation symbols graphically. If you
don't have a printer that will print graphics, set the Print as
Graphics option on the Setup: Initial Settings menu to No. In this
case, WordPerfect will attempt to substitute a character in a
different font for the symbol it needs to create; it will print a
blank space if it cannot make a substitution.
     To position the equation on the page, you position the
graphics box that contains it (see Graphics). Although you can
create equations in any type of graphics box, if you use an
equation box, WordPerfect will automatically center it between the
left and right margins, as is standard mathematical practice.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Compose
     Cross-Reference
     Graphics
     Math
     Printing Current Document

A)Esc Key(A

     Repeats a character (other than a number) or cursor-movement
key pressed a specified number of times.

B)Key Sequence--Repeating for the Default Value(B

     To repeat a character or cursor movement for the default
repeat value:

          Esc <character or cursor movement key>

B)Key Sequence--Repeating for a New Value(B

     To repeat a character or cursor movement for a new repeat
value:

          Esc <number of times to repeat> <character or cursor
          movement key>

B)Usage(B

     The Esc(ape) key in WordPerfect is used primarily to repeat a
keyboard character (other than a number) or a cursor-movement
command. It is only secondarily used to cancel the current
WordPerfect command (see Canceling a Command). When you press the
Esc key, WordPerfect displays the prompt

          Repeat Value = 8

If the next key you press is not a number, WordPerfect will enter
that character eight times. If you press a cursor-movement key,
WordPerfect will repeat the cursor movement eight times.
     If you press the Delete key after pressing Esc, WordPerfect
will delete the next eight characters from the cursor's position
to the right. If you press the spacebar after the Esc key, it will
insert eight spaces.
     You can vary the number of repetitions by entering a new
repeat number before pressing the key. WordPerfect uses the new
repeat value only that time and then returns to the default
number.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Canceling a Command
     Cursor Movement
     List Files

A)Exit(A

     Quits WordPerfect and returns to DOS, or clears the document
editing screen to begin a new document.

B)Key Sequence(B

          F7 (Exit) or File pull-down then Exit
           Save document? Yes (No)
           Document to be saved: <file name> ─┘ Replace <file
          name> No (Yes)
           Exit WordPerfect? No (Yes)

B)Usage-General(B

     Exit (F7) is used to clear the current editing screen when
you want to begin a new document, or to quit WordPerfect when you
are finished using the word processor. You also use Exit to leave
menus such as Setup, Format, and so on, and after entering the
text of headers, footers, footnotes, and endnotes.

B)Usage--Saving and Exiting(B

     When you press Exit during normal document editing, you see
the prompt

          Save document? Yes (No)

Press ─┘ to accept the default setting of Yes, unless you wish to
abandon the document and any editing you have made to it (thereby
exiting without saving the document). When you press ─┘,
WordPerfect will prompt you for the name of the document. Enter
the document name if you haven't saved it before (see Save) and
press ─┘. If you have already saved the document at least once,
the prompt will contain the document name. If you want to save the
document under a new name, type it in or edit the existing name.
If you want to save it under the same name, simply press ─┘.
WordPerfect will respond with the prompt

          Replace <file name>? No (Yes)

Choose Yes. After the document is saved, WordPerfect will prompt
you either to exit from the current document editing screen (if
you are using both Doc 1 and Doc 2) or to from exit WordPerfect.
The default response is No, so that you can press ─┘ to remain in
the current editing screen. If you decide not to clear your
document from the editing screen, press Cancel (F1) to retain it
and return to editing its text.
     If you answer Yes to exiting from WordPerfect, you will be
returned to DOS or to the WordPerfect Library shell, if you use
that utility. If you answer Yes to exiting from the current
document editing screen (either Doc 1 or Doc 2), you will be
returned to the other editing screen. If you answer No to exiting
from WordPerfect or the current document editing screen, you will
remain in it, and you can begin creating a new document (using the
WordPerfect formatting defaults) or retrieve another document for
editing.
     If you are using long document names (see Short/Long Document
Names), you will be prompted for a long document name as well as a
document type when you exit. You can enter up to 68 characters,
including spaces, for the name and up to 20 characters for the
type, or, if the document has been previously saved, you can save
it under the same name by pressing ─┘ and choosing Y when you are
prompted to confirm the replacement. WordPerfect will then show
you the DOS file name: either its eight-character abbreviation of
your long name (with an extension consisting of the first three
letters of the document type) or a file name you used when saving
the document previously.

B)Usage--Quitting WordPerfect without Using Exit(B

     In WordPerfect, it is important that you exit from the
program properly before you turn off the computer. WordPerfect
automatically keeps special files, called "overflow files," that
are not emptied and closed until you press F7 (Exit).
     If you simply use Save (F10), and then turn off the power,
WordPerfect will detect the presence of these files the next time
you start the program, and it will beep and display this prompt on
the initial startup screen:

          Are other copies of WordPerfect currently running? Yes
          (No)

Responding No tells WordPerfect to erase the contents of the
overflow files and move to the standard editing screen.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Footnotes and Endnotes
     Go To DOS/Shell
     Headers and Footers
     Save
     Short/Long Document Names (Version 5.1)

A)Fast Save(A

     Saves an unformatted version of your document at a faster
rate.

B)Sequence of Steps(B

          Shift-F1 (Setup) or File pull-down then Setup then
          Environment
           Fast Save (unformatted) Yes (No)
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     Fast Save saves a copy of the document on the editing screen
without formatting it when you use Exit (F7) and save before
quitting or Save (F10). In 5.0, a document that has been fast
saved, however, can't be printed from disk unless the cursor was
located at the very end of the document when you saved it. In 5.1,
there is not such limitation.
     If you aren't concerned with the time it takes to save your
document and want to be able to use any of WordPerfect's printing
methods at any time, you can leave the Fast Save option turned
off.
     If you use Fast Save in version 5.0 and find that you can't
print a document on disk because of it, retrieve the document,
press Home Home Down Arrow, and save it again. Then issue the
command to print it from disk.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Printing
     Printing a Document on Disk

A)Find (5.1) or Word Search (5.0)(A

     Locates all of the files in the current directory that
contain a specified word or phrase.

B)Key Sequence--Performing a Word Search(B

     To perform a word search in version 5.1:

          F5 (List Files) ─┘ or File pull-down
          then List Files ─┘
           Find
           Name; Doc Summary; First Pg; Entire Doc; Conditions;
          Undo
           Word Pattern: <word(s) or phrase>

B)Key Sequence--Setting Search Conditions(B

     To set the search conditions in version 5.1:

          F5 (List Files) ─┘ or File pull-down
          then List Files ─┘
           Find
           Conditions
           Perform Search; Reset Conditions; Revision Date;
          Text; Document Summary (Creation Date; Document Name;
          Document Type; Author; Typist; Subject; Account;
          Keywords; Abstract)
           F7 (Exit)

     Note: In WordPerfect 5.0, Find is called Word Search, and the
First Pg, Entire Doc, and Undo options appear on the Conditions
submenu.

B)Usage--General(B

     The Find option of the List Files menu (called Word Search in
WordPerfect 5.0) allows you to search through all the files in one
directory or through the files you have explicitly marked with an
asterisk (*) to find a specific word or phrase (up to 39
characters in 5.1 or 20 characters in 5.0).
     Version 5.1: After WordPerfect locates the files that contain
what you are searching for, it displays them separately. You can
use the cursor keys to move among them, pressing ─┘ to view their
contents and determine which of them are the documents you are
seeking. While you are looking at the contents of a file, you can
use the Search feature (F2) to locate a particular word or phrase.
You can also retrieve a marked file to the editing screen.
     Version 5.0: After WordPerfect locates the files that contain
what you are searching for, it marks them with an asterisk on the
List Files screen. You can use the Look option to view their
contents and determine which of them are the documents you are
seeking. You can also retrieve a marked file to the editing
screen.
     Both Versions: To return to the List Files screen with the
marked files still displayed, press Exit (F7). To return to List
Files with the marked files displayed after retrieving a file,
press List Files (F5) twice.

B)Setting Search Options (Version 5.1)(B

     Select Name from the Find menu to search for a file by name.
You can enter part of a name pattern, and WordPerfect will display
all the names of the files it finds that match that pattern (see
"Entering Patterns for Word Searches" below).
     The next three options on the Find menu allow you to specify
which part of the document you want to search. Select Doc Summary
to search only in the document summaries of the files you have
marked or of all the files in the directory, if you haven't marked
any particular ones.
     Select First Pg to search through only the first page or the
first 4000 characters of each file.
     Select Entire Doc to search through all the files you have
marked or all the files in the directory.
     Select Conditions to enter specialized search conditions, as
discussed below.
     To repeat a search on the same group of files, select Undo.
Normally, if you were searching through ten files and WordPerfect
located what you were searching for in two files, the next search
you carried out would be on the two files that it located.
Selecting this option brings you back to your original List Files
screen--containing, in this example, ten files.

B)Setting Search Options (Version 5.0)(B

     After you select Word Search, you will see the following
menu:

          1 Document Summary; 2 First Page; 3 Entire Document; 4
          Conditions:0

     Select Document Summary for a word, phrase, or pattern only
in the document summaries of the files you have marked or of all
the files in the directory, if you haven't marked any particular
ones.
     Select First Page to search through only the first page or
the first 4000 characters of each file.
     Select Entire Document to search through all the files you
have marked or all the files in the directory.
     Select Conditions to enter specialized search conditions.

B)Setting Search Conditions (Version 5.1)(B

     If you select Conditions, you can then choose the conditions
that the files must meet.
     The Perform Search On option lists the number of files that
will be searched. After the search has finished, this number
changes to the number of files that the search located. To start a
search after selecting other search conditions, select this
option.
     Use the Reset Search Conditions option to clear the search
conditions and enter new ones for the next search.
     Revision Date allows you to specify that files created on or
between certain dates be included in the search. You can enter the
date with or without leading zeroes--as 01/02/91 or as 1/2/91, for
example.
     Text allows you to combine three types of searches--document
summaries, first page, and complete document--into one. You can
enter a different search pattern for each and then search for all
three patterns at once. When you have entered your patterns,
select Perform Search to begin the search.
     Document Summary allows you to search for specific items
within your document summaries (see Document Summary for details
about each of these items).

     Version 5.0: The First Pg, Entire Doc, and Undo options,
discussed under "Setting Search Options (Version 5.1)," appear on
the Conditions submenu instead.

B)Entering Patterns for Word Searches (Both Versions)(B

     When you search a directory for a file containing a specific
word or phrase that contains spaces, you must enter the word or
phrase to be searched for in quotation marks.
     You can search for an exact phrase by adding a blank space
after the last letter and before the last quotation mark. You can
also enter an exact phrase to be searched for by pressing Ctrl-
─┘ before typing the phrase.
     You can also use the wildcards ?, *, and - to specify the
search pattern. The question mark represents a single character,
and the asterisk and hyphen represent zero or more characters. For
example, if you are searching for a file containing an address for
a company and you are sure that its name began with "South" but do
not remember whether its full name is Southwestern, Southeastern,
or Southern, you can enter the word pattern as South*.
     To search for a phrase beginning with one pattern and ending
with another, enter it as South*Industries. This will locate all
phrases starting with "South" and ending with "Industries," such
as Southern Industries, Southwestern Industries, south of the
industries, and so forth. Uppercase and lowercase are considered
to be the same.

B)Using Logical Operators in Searches (Both Versions)(B

     You can further expand or restrict a word search by using
semicolons and blank spaces (which stand for "and") or commas
(which stand for "or"). For example, to search for files that
contain both the word invoice and the phrase past due, you enter
invoice;"past due". To search for files that contain either the
word invoice or the phrase past due, enter invoice,"past due".
     To search for files that contain either the word invoice or
the phrase past due in combination with the word October, enter
invoice,"past due";October.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Document Summary
     List Files
     Name Search
     Search
     Search and Replace

A)Flush Right(A

     Aligns your text flush with the right margin setting.

B)Key Sequence--Aligning Text as You Type(B

     To align text flush right as you type it:

          Alt-F6 (Flush Right)
          or Layout then Align then Flush Right
           <text> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Aligning Existing Text(B

     To align existing text flush right:

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight all lines to be flush right]
           Alt-F6 (Flush Right) or
          Layout pull-down then Align then Flush Right
           [Just:Right]? No (Yes)

B)Usage(B

     To align text on the right margin, follow the key sequence.
To right-align text after it has been entered, mark the text with
Block (Alt-F4) and then select Flush Right (Alt-F6). WordPerfect
will prompt you. To have the marked text right-aligned, simply
type Y for Yes.
     To remove the right alignment, locate and delete its code in
the Reveal Codes screen.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Center
     Margin Release

A)Font(A

     Allows you to change the size or appearance of the current
fonts used in your document.

B)Key Sequence--Changing a Font Size(B

     To change the size of a font:

          Ctrl-F8 (Font) then Size or Font pull-down
           Supscrpt; Subscrpt; Fine; Small; Large; Vry Large;
          Ext Large

B)Key Sequence--Changing a Font's Appearance(B

          Ctrl-F8 (Font) or Font pull-down
           Appearance
           Bold; Undrln; Dbl Und; Italc; Outln; Shadw; Sm Cap;
          Redln; Stkout

B)Key Sequence--Returning to Defined Font(B

     To return to the initial font defined for the selected
printer:

          Ctrl-F8 (Font) or Font pull-down
           Normal

B)Usage--General(B

     Font (Ctrl-F8 or the Font pull-down menu) controls a variety
of options, all of which affect the way your text appears when
printed. This section shows how to enhance the currently selected
font by changing either its size or its appearance. For changing
the current font, see Base Font. For using Font to select colors
for printing, see Print Color. The options Bold, Undrln, Redln,
and Stkout on the Appearance menu are discussed under their own
reference entries in this book.
     All of the options on the Size and Appearance menus insert a
pair of formatting codes and place the cursor between them. You
can then enter the text that you want enhanced by the attribute
selected. To return to the normal text font, either press the
Right Arrow key once to move the cursor beyond the last code of
the pair, or select the Normal option on the Font menu (this does
the same thing as pressing Right Arrow). To apply one of these
attributes to existing text, mark it as a block using Alt-F4
(Block) before selecting the appropriate Size or Appearance menu
option.
     To delete any size or appearance attributes assigned to text,
locate the pair of codes in the Reveal Codes screen and delete
either one of them.

B)Usage--Changing the Font Size(B

     The Font menu presents you with seven options. The first two
are used for superscripting and subscripting characters.
Superscripted text is printed a half-line above the baseline of
the normal text, and subscripted text is printed a half-line
below. To change the amount of adjustment up or down, use the
Advance feature (see Advance) with either option.
     The five remaining size options are used to change only the
relative size of the current font. The actual point size or pitch
used to produce the text that is assigned the attributes Fine,
Small, Large, Very Large, and Extra Large depends upon the
capabilities of the currently selected printer and the range of
fonts installed for that printer.
     When you change the size of the text using one of these
options, WordPerfect automatically adjusts the line spacing to
accommodate the larger or smaller size. To overrule this
adjustment, use the Line Height option on the Line Format menu
(see Line Height).

B)Changing the Appearance of the Font(B

     When you select the Appearance option on the Font menu, you
are presented with nine options to enhance your text. The first
two attributes, Bold and Undrln, can also be accessed by pressing
F6 or F8 respectively (see Bold and Underline). The remaining
attributes can only be accessed from this menu.
     The attributes of double underlining (Dbl Und), italics
(Italc), outline, shadow, and small caps can't be produced by
every printer. To determine whether your printer can produce these
effects, print the PRINTER.TST file that is supplied with the
program. If you select an enhancement that your printer doesn't
support, WordPerfect will ignore it (unless you have specified
italics, in which case the program will substitute underlining).

     Note: The Small Caps option (Sm Cap) produces all uppercase
letters in a smaller font size, a style most commonly used with
acronyms and with times (such as 9:00 A.M.) When entering text
after selecting the Sm Cap option, you don't need to use the Shift
key to capitalize the text.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Advance
     Base Font
     Bold
     Cartridges and Fonts
     Compose
     Line Height
     Overstrike
     Print Color
     Printing Current Document
     Redline/Strikeout
     Underline

A)Footnotes and Endnotes(A1

     Allows you to add footnotes that appear at the bottom of the
page or endnotes that appear at a place of your choice in the
document.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F7 (Footnote) then Footnote; Endnote; Endnote
          Placement then Create; Edit; New Number; Options
          or Layout pull-down then Footnote then Create; Edit;
          New Number; Options, or Endnote then Create; Edit; New
          Number; Options; Placement


B)Usage--General(B

     Notes to the text are automatically numbered for you in
WordPerfect. If you want the text of the note to appear on the
same page as its reference number, you create a footnote. If you
want all of the notes to appear together somewhere in the
document, you create an endnote.
     The text of footnotes and endnotes is not shown in the text,
only their reference numbers. To see the notes before printing,
you must use the View Document option on the Print menu (see View
Document).

B)Usage--Creating Notes(B

     To create a footnote or endnote in the text, follow these
steps:

       1. Move the cursor to the position where you want the
          footnote or endnote reference number to appear.
       2. Press Footnote (Ctrl-F7) or use the Layout pull-down
          menu.
       3. Select either the Footnote or Endnote option.
       4. Select the Create option.
       5. Type the text of your note (insert a space between the
          number on the note editing screen and the text).
       6. Press Exit (F7) when you are finished entering the note
          text.

     To delete a footnote or endnote from the document, locate and
delete the [Footnote] or [Endnote] code in the Reveal Codes
screen.

B)Usage--Assigning a New Number(B

     WordPerfect automatically begins footnote and endnote
numbering from 1. To change the starting number for all notes or
to renumber a series of notes from a particular place in the
document, use the New Number option on the Footnote or Endnote
menu. This feature is especially useful if the document that
contains the notes is a subdocument (like a book chapter) of a
master document that requires sequential numbering of the notes in
all the documents to be printed together (see Master Document).
     To enter a new starting note number, follow these steps:

       1. Move the cursor to the place in the document where the
          notes are to be renumbered (the top of the document if
          all notes are to be renumbered).
       2. Press Footnote (Ctrl-F7) or use the Layout pull-down
          menu.
       3. Select either the Footnote or Endnote option.
       4. Select the New Number option.
       5. Enter the new starting number and press ─┘.
       6. Press Screen (Ctrl-F3) and ─┘ to renumber notes.

     WordPerfect inserts a [New Ftn Num] or [New End Num] code in
the document at the cursor's position when you use this option.

B)Usage--Specifying Endnote Placement(B

     You can designate where the text of endnotes is to appear by
using the Endnote Placement option. If you don't locate the cursor
and use Endnote Placement to specify where the endnotes are to be
inserted, WordPerfect will automatically place them at the end of
your document.
     When you use the Endnote Placement option, WordPerfect
inserts an [Endnote Placement] code at the cursor's position and
prompts you with

          Restart endnote numbering? Yes (No)

If you choose to restart the endnote numbering from 1, press ─┘
to answer Yes to this prompt (WordPerfect inserts the code [New
End Num:1] in the document). If you want to retain sequential
numbering from the last endnote number, type N for No. After you
respond to this prompt, WordPerfect inserts the following comments
in the text:

          Endnote Placement.
          It is not known how much space endnotes will occupy
          here.
          Generate to determine.

It also automatically inserts a hard page break after this
comment (see Page Break, Soft and Hard).
     To generate the endnotes at this point, select Mark Text
(Alt-F5), Generate; select Generate Tables, Indexes, Automatic
References, etc.; press ─┘; and respond Yes to the prompt:

          Existing tables, lists, and indexes will be replaced.
          Continue? Yes (No)

After the endnotes are generated, you will see the comment
"Endnote Placement" on the screen. This comment will take up as
much space as is required to print all of the endnotes up to that
point in the document. To view your endnotes, use the View
Document option on the Print menu (Shift-F7).
     If you want the text of your endnotes to appear on a new
page, be sure to insert a hard page break (Ctrl-─┘) before the
Endnote Placement comment box.

B)Usage--Changing the Formatting of Notes(B

     When printing your footnotes and endnotes, WordPerfect makes
certain assumptions as to how they are to be formatted. You can,
however, control their formatting by using Options on the Footnote
or Endnote menu. Press F to see an illustration of the Footnote
Options menu.
     To change the style of the numbers in the text or note for
footnotes or endnotes, select the appropriate options and enter
the commands to insert the attributes that you wish to use. Note
that you can insert graphics into a note if you select the
Character type for the graphics box (see Graphics).
     When specifying the spacing within footnotes or endnotes,
enter 1 for single spacing, 1.5 for one-and-a-half spacing, 2 for
double spacing, and so on. You can specify the spacing between
notes and the amount of note to keep together on a page by
entering a measurement in inches.
     When you select the option to change the numbering method for
footnotes or endnotes, you are presented with these options:

          1 Numbers; 2 Letters; 3 Characters: 0

When you select Characters, you can specify up to five different
characters to be used. After all of the characters you entered are
used, WordPerfect will double and then triple them, if necessary.
     For footnotes, you may designate that your footnotes be
renumbered on each new page or change the type of line separator
used to demarcate the footnote from the body of the text. When you
select Line Separating Text and Footnotes, you are presented with
these options:

          1 No Line; 2 2-inch Line; 3 Margin to Margin

     The footnote option Print Continued Messages can be used to
have WordPerfect print a "Continued..." message on the last line
of any footnote that is split across pages (this message will also
be printed on the first line of the note on the following page).
You can use the Footnotes at Bottom of Page option (No) to have
the footnotes moved up on a short page so that they are printed
right under the body of the text, rather than at the very bottom
of the page with multiple blank lines separating the footnotes
from the text.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Cross-Reference
     Exit
     Headers and Footers
     Mark Text
     Master Document
     Page Break, Soft and Hard
     View Document

A)Force Odd/Even Page(A

     Forces the page to be numbered with either an odd or even
number.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Page
           Force Odd/Even Page
           Odd; Even
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     You can use the Force Odd/Even Page feature to ensure that a
particular page will always be given either an odd or even page
number. To use this command, position the cursor at the top of the
page that is always to have either an odd or even page number and
follow the key sequence. When you do, the program inserts either a
[Force:Odd] or [Force:Even] formatting code at the cursor's
position.
     WordPerfect will renumber the page only if Force Odd/Even
Page changes it from odd to even or vice versa. Any change to the
page number is reflected in the Pg indicator on the status line.
     Note that the Force Odd/Even Page feature has no effect if
you have not specified that some type of page numbering be used in
the document (either by issuing the Page Numbering command or by
inserting a Page code in a header or footer).
     To return to regular page numbering, locate and delete the
[Force] codes in the Reveal Codes screen.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Headers and Footers
     Page Numbering

A)Forms (5.0)(A

     In version 5.0, the Format and Print menus allow you to set
up a form definition and then use it to print all or part of your
document.
     See Paper Size/Type for information about how to use this
feature in version 5.1.

B)Key Sequence--Defining, Modifying, or Deleting a Form(B

          Shift-F7 (Print)
           S Select Printer
           [highlight printer to print form]
           Edit
           Forms
           Add; Delete; Edit
           F7 (Exit)

B)Key Sequence--Using a Form Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format)
           Page
           Paper Size Type
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage--General(B

     In version 5.0, you use the Forms option on the Select
Printer Forms menu to create a form definition, which stipulates
such settings as the paper size and type, orientation, offsets,
and location of the paper. You can then apply this form definition
to a document by specifying the size and type of paper it uses on
the Page Format menu.
     WordPerfect comes with three predefined forms: Standard
letter size in either portrait (narrow) or landscape (wide) mode,
Envelope, and ALL OTHERS (invoked when you try to use a form
definition that WordPerfect can't find). You can modify the
settings of these forms or add new definitions to the list. To
remove a form definition, select the Delete option on the Printer
Select: Forms menu.

B)Usage--Creating a Form Definition (5.0)(B

     As indicated by the key sequence, the form definitions that
you create are part of the printer definition. When you select the
Add option on the Printer Select: Forms menu, you are presented
with two full-screen menus: the Form Type menu and the Forms menu.
When you select the Edit option, you are presented only with the
second Forms menu, where you modify to the selected definition.
     When adding a new form definition, you must first specify the
type of form to be used. The Form Type menu contains the name of
seven frequently used forms. To select one of these, simply enter
its mnemonic letter or number. If you want to add your own form
description, select Other and enter its name.
     After indicating the type of form to be used, you are
presented with the Forms menu. Here, you indicate the paper size,
orientation of the text on the form, whether it is initially
present, its location (that is, type of feed or bin number), and
any special page offsets to be used.
     If you need to modify the size of the form, select the Form
Size option. If none of the predefined size options will do,
select the Other option and enter the width and length.
     To modify the placement of the text on the page, select the
Orientation option. You have three choices: Portrait, Landscape,
or Both. If you select Portrait, the text will run parallel to the
insertion edge of the form. If you select Landscape, it will run
perpendicular to the insertion edge. Select Both only when your
printer allows you to manually determine the orientation.
     The setting of the third option, Initially Present, should be
Yes unless the form must be manually fed to the printer.
     The Location option determines the type of paper feed; it has
three options: Continuous, Bin Number, and Manual.
     Use the Page Offsets option when the printhead must be
positioned in relation to the top and left edge of the form in the
printer. You can enter either positive or negative offsets for the
Top and Side settings.

B)Usage--Using a Form Definition (5.0)(B

     To use a form definition to print your document, select the
appropriate paper size and type from the Page Format: Paper Size
menu, which presents a full-screen menu of common paper sizes.
     After you select the paper size, the Paper Type menu appears.
To select a named form definition, choose the Other option. This
takes you to the Defined Form Types screen, with three options
(Select, Other, and Name Search) and an alphabetical list of the
forms you have defined. Highlight the appropriate name and type 1
or S or press ─┘.
     If WordPerfect can't match the paper size and type requested
against one of the form definitions, you will see the message
"requested form is unavailable." The program will print the
document using the paper size specified; however, it will not use
any of the formatting instructions attached to the form
definition.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Labels
     Margins, Left and Right
     Margins, Top and Bottom
     Paper Size/Type
     Printer, Edit

A)Function Keys(A

     The features associated with the various function key
combinations are shown in the table below:

The Function Keys:
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

    KEY  ALONE        WITH CTRL      WITH SHIFT     WITH ALT
    F1   Cancel       Shell          Setup          Thesaurus
    F2   Search      Spell          Search        Replace
    F3   Help         Screen         Switch         Reveal
    F4   Indent      More           Indent       Block
    F5   List Files   Text In/Out    Date/Outline   Mark Text
    F6   Bold         Tab Align      Center         Flush Right
    F7   Exit         Footnote       Print          Columns/Table
    F8   Underline    Font           Format         Style
    F9   End Field    Merge/Sort     Merge Codes    Graphics
    F10  Save         Macro Define   Retrieve       Macro

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

A)Go To(A

     Moves the cursor to a specific character, page, or text
column, or to the previous cursor position.

B)Key Sequence--Going to a Specific Character(B

     To go to the next occurrence of a character:

          Ctrl-Home (Go To) or Search pull-down then <character>

B)Key Sequence-Going to a Specific Page(B

     To go to a specific page in the document:

          Ctrl-Home (Go To) or Search pull-down then Goto <page
          number> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Returning to the Previous Character Position(B

          Ctrl-Home Ctrl-Home

B)Key Sequence--Moving the Cursor between Text Columns(B

          Ctrl-Home (Go To) or Search pull-down then Goto Right
          Arrow or Left Arrow

B)Usage(B

     The Go To feature (Ctrl-Home) is used to move directly to a
character or the top of a page. For example, to move to the next
occurrence of a hard return (end of paragraph) in the document,
you press Ctrl-Home and press the ─┘ key. To go to the next
period (end of sentence), press Ctrl-Home and type a period. To
move directly to the top of a specific page, press Ctrl-Home, type
the page number, and press ─┘.
     To return the cursor to its previous position in the
document, press Ctrl-Home twice. This is especially useful when
you've moved a block of text to a new place in the document and
wish to return immediately to the place from which the block was
moved.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Cursor Movement

A)Go To DOS/Shell(A

     Allows you to exit from WordPerfect temporarily to go to DOS
or to the WordPerfect Library Shell, if you run WordPerfect under
this utility.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F1 (Shell) or File pull-down then Goto DOS
           Go to DOS; DOS Command
           <DOS command>
           EXIT ─┘ (to return to WordPerfect)

B)Usage(B

     The Go To DOS or Shell feature allows you to leave
WordPerfect temporarily and enter DOS commands while the word
processor is still loaded in memory. However, when you go to DOS
and try to run another program, you may find that your computer
doesn't have sufficient memory to load the new program along with
WordPerfect. Also, you should not use this feature to load a RAM-
resident utility (sometimes called a TSR), such as SideKick.
Always exit WordPerfect before loading this type of software.
     When you have finished executing your commands at the DOS
prompt and are ready to return to WordPerfect, type the word EXIT
(don't press the Exit key--F7) and press ─┘. This will return you
immediately to the editing screen and any document you have on it.
     If you started WordPerfect from the WordPerfect Library
shell, you will be returned to the Library Shell menu when you use
the Go To DOS feature. From there, you can go to the DOS prompt by
selecting the Go to DOS command on the Shell menu (it too uses the
key sequence Ctrl-F1 1). When you are finished with DOS, type EXIT
to return to the Library Shell menu. To return to WordPerfect,
type the program letter you have assigned to WordPerfect 5.0.
     In Version 5.1, you can also execute one DOS command by
choosing DOS Command without leaving WordPerfect. This allows you
to write macros that run DOS commands, because WordPerfect is
never exited (see Macros).

-----------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Exit
     Macros

A)Graphics(A2

     Allows you to combine graphics created by other programs with
the text of your document or to draw rules in the document.

B)Key Sequence--Creating or Editing a Graphics Box(B

          Alt-F9 (Graphics) or Graphics pull-down
           Figure; Table Box; Text Box; User Box; Line;
          Equation
           Create; Edit; New Number; Options

     Note: In version 5.0, there is no Equation option on the
Graphics menu.

B)Key Sequence--Creating a Line Graphic(B

     To create a Horizontal or Vertical Line graphic:

          Alt-F9 (Graphics) or Graphics pull-down
           Line
           Create Line: Horizontal; Vertical or Edit Line:
          Horizontal; Vertical

     Note: In version 5.0, the line options are Horizontal
Position; Vertical Position; Length of Line; Width of Line; Gray
Shading (% of black). The Vertical Position option appears only
when you are creating a vertical line.

B)Usage--General(B

     You can use Graphics (Alt-F9, or choose Graphics from the
pull-down menu) to import a variety of illustrations or graphics
created with other graphics programs, as well as digitized images
created with scanners, and place them directly in your document.
In version 5.1, you can use the Graphics feature to import
spreadsheets into graphics boxes and to draw vertical and
horizontal lines (rules).
     To insert a graphic image into a document, you must first
create a box to contain it. WordPerfect supports four different
box types: Figure boxes for any type of graphic image, Table boxes
for tables of numbers, Text boxes for any text that is set off
from the body of the document (such as sidebars), and User-Defined
boxes for any other type of image. Version 5.1 also provides a
special Equation box type for equations (see Equations).
     You can use graphics boxes in the body of your document and
in its headers, footers, footnotes, and endnotes. If you want to
insert a graphics box in a style that you are creating (see
Styles), the box must either be empty or contain only text.

B)Usage--Defining a Graphics Box(B

     After selecting the appropriate type of box for your graphic,
select the Create option. The menu options shown on the Definition
screen are similar for all types of graphics boxes.
     To retrieve a file that contains text, or an image or graph
created with another program, select the Filename option and type
in the name of the file, including its extension. Be sure to
include the complete path name if the graphics file isn't located
in the current directory. Note that you don't have to specify the
file at the time you create the graphics box to contain it. You
can do this later by choosing the Edit option from the box menu,
designating the number, and then choosing the Filename option from
the Definition screen.
     You can press F5 and ─┘ to view the contents of the current
directory, or press F5 and enter another directory name to see the
contents of that directory. This puts you in the List Files
screen, where you can retrieve the file you want (see List Files).
     The Contents option, which is new in version 5.1, displays
another menu from which you can choose the type of information
that you want to put in the graphics box--a graphic image, graphic
on disk, text, or equation. Choose the Graphic on Disk option if
you want your graphic to be stored in a separate disk file instead
of being kept with the document. If you are using the graphic
image in a style (see Styles), be sure to use this option.
Likewise, if you are using one image repeatedly in a document,
storing it separately keeps the size of your document down.
Selecting Equation and then choosing Edit will automatically
display the equation editor (see Equations).
     If you want to add a caption to your figure or table, select
the Caption option. This brings you to an editing screen much like
the ones used to enter headers and footers. The screen contains
the name of the box followed by its number. You may delete this
text. If you retain the number, it will automatically be updated
if you later define or delete graphics boxes (of the same type)
that precede it in the document.
     Three types of graphics boxes are associated with the Anchor
Type option: Paragraph, which keeps the graphics box adjacent to
the paragraph text; Page, which is affixed to a stationary
position on the page; and Character, which is treated like a
single character. WordPerfect will always wrap the text of a line
that contains a Character box so it is below the boundary of the
box, on the next line. Note that Character boxes are the only type
that you can add to footnotes and endnotes.
     If you select the Page type, you will be asked for the number
of pages to skip. If you want the graphics box to remain at a
certain position on the page, be sure to locate the cursor at the
beginning of the page before you select this option. Then enter 0
if you want the box to appear on the current page, 1 if you want
it to appear on the next page, and so forth.

B)Usage--Vertical and Horizontal Position(B

     The Vertical and Horizontal Position options allow you to
control the placement of the graphics box on the page. The
settings available for them differ according to the type of
graphics box chosen.
     For the Paragraph type, the vertical position setting
represents the vertical distance from the first line of the
paragraph. The default is 0", which places the graphic even with
the paragraph's first line. For the Page type, you can align the
box vertically with the top or bottom margin, center it on the
page, or enter an offset measured from the top edge of the page.
If you select Full Page, the graphics box expands to the margin
settings for that page. For the Character type, you can have the
graphics box positioned so that the text of the line it's on is
aligned with the top, center, or bottom of the box.
     You can position a Paragraph box horizontally so that it
aligns with the left or right edge, or is centered between the
edges of the area that contains its associated paragraph text. As
long as the Wrap Text Around Box option is set to Yes (see below),
the text of the paragraph will wrap around the graphics box. In
addition, you can have the box fill this entire area from left to
right by choosing the Both Left & Right option.
     For a Page box, you have three options for setting the
horizontal position of the graphics box: Margins, which allows you
to left-align, right-align, center, or expand the box to left and
right margins; Columns, which allows you to select a text column
or range of columns (see Columns, Text [Newspaper and Parallel]),
using the same alignment options as with Margins; and Set
Position, which allows you to position the box a specific
measurement in from the left edge of the page. When using the
Column option, you can designate a range of text columns by
entering their column numbers separated by a hyphen (as in 2-3).
     When using the character type of graphics box, you don't need
to assign a horizontal position because WordPerfect automatically
places the box to the left of the character that contains the
cursor at the time you define it.
     When you change the vertical position, you can choose Top,
Center, or Bottom, or align the baselines. Choose Bottom if you
want to align the baseline of a graphic image with the line of
text that contains its graphics box. Choose Baseline if the box
contains an equation and you want to align the equation's baseline
with the line of text that contains the box.
     Use the Size option to modify the size of the graphics box.
When you select this option, you have four choices:

          1 Set Width/Auto Height; 2 Set Height/Auto Width; 3 Set
          Both; 4 Auto Both

     Note: In version 5.0, the Both Width and Height option is
equivalent to Set Both, and there is no Auto Both option.

     To set both height and width dimensions for the graphics box,
select Set Both and then enter the two dimensions. WordPerfect
will automatically calculate the opposite dimension if you change
the width of the box with the Set Width option or the height with
the Height option. Select Auto Both to restore the box's original
dimensions.
     WordPerfect will flow the text around the borders of the
graphics box if you set the Wrap Text Around Box option to Yes. On
the editing screen, it draws the outline of the graphics box
(without displaying the illustration or graph) as you enter the
text of the document. If you change this setting to No, the text
will go through the graphic and the box outline will not appear on
the editing screen. You can preview the positioning of the text
around the graphics box by using the View Document feature (see
View Document).

B)Usage--the Edit Option(B

     Use the Edit option to enter or edit the text for the
graphics box or to modify the position or size of an illustration
imported from the graphics file designated in the Filename option
(described above).
     When the graphics box contains only text, you can enter or
edit as you would any other text in WordPerfect after selecting
the Edit option. You can change the font, size, alignment, or
attributes of the text by using the appropriate WordPerfect
commands.
     When the graphics box contains an illustration or graph
created in another program, and you select the Edit option,
WordPerfect displays it in graphics mode (if your computer has a
graphics card) on the screen surrounded by an outline representing
the size and shape of the graphics box that contains it. From
here, you can modify its size, its position, or both. Note that
you can't add text to an illustration or graph when editing it;
this must be done in the program that produced the graphics file.
     To move the graphic image in the box, you can press any arrow
key. To enlarge the image in the box, press PgUp (or select it
from the menu); to shrink it, press PgDn. You can change its
proportions by selecting the Scale option and entering a Y-scale
(or vertical scale) percentage and an X-scale (horizontal)
percentage. To rotate the image clockwise, press the Screen Up key
(- on the numeric keypad). To rotate the image counterclockwise,
press the Screen Down key (+ on the numeric keypad). You can also
rotate the image by selecting the Rotate option and entering the
percentage of rotation (where 100% is 360 degrees). When using
this option, you can also designate that the image be flipped, by
answering Yes to the "Mirror Image? No (Yes)" question that
appears after a percentage is entered.
     The % Change option is activated by pressing the Ins (Insert)
key. The percentage of change affects the amount that the image is
moved, scaled, or rotated when applying the techniques discussed
above. You can choose among 1%, 5%, 10%, or 25% change by pressing
the Ins key until the percentage you want to use appears in the
lower right corner of the screen.
     You can use the Invert option on the Edit screen to reverse
the image if it is a bitmap graphic rather than a line drawing.
When you use it, each white dot (or pixel) is changed to black and
each black dot to white. Graphics imported from .WPG files (the
clip art files included with WordPerfect) and .PIC files (which
contain Lotus 1-2-3 graphs) are considered line drawings and,
therefore, can't be inverted, whereas EPS (Encapsulated
PostScript) and TIFF (Tagged Image File Format--created by
scanners) files can be inverted.
     After you have made all the desired modifications to your
graphic, press F7 (Exit) to return to the Definition screen. If
you want to return the image to the original settings, press the
Go To key combination, Ctrl-Home.

B)Usage--Resetting Graphics Box Numbers(B

     WordPerfect numbers each type of graphics box consecutively.
You can start a new numbering system at any point in your document
by selecting a graphics box type and then choosing New Number. Be
sure to position the cursor before the code of the graphics box
type where you want to start renumbering.
     Because WordPerfect maintains this numbering system for each
box type, it can automatically generate a list of your graphics
boxes (see Lists).

B)Usage--Adjusting the Settings for a Graphics Box(B

     WordPerfect allows you to modify many of the default settings
for the graphics boxes you insert in the document. These include
the style of the border of the graphics, the inside space between
the image and the borders of the box, the outside space between
the text and the borders of the box, level numbering methods, the
position of the caption, and the gray shading used in the box.
     To change any of these settings, move the cursor to the place
in the document that contains your graphics box, press Alt-F9
(Graphics) or choose Graphics from the pull-down menu. Select the
option that corresponds to the type of box used there, and then
select Options. When you change any of the options on this screen,
they affect the style of any of the graphics boxes of the same
type from the position of the cursor when you made the changes
forward in the document. Press F to see an illustration of the
Figure Options screen.

B)Usage--Creating Horizontal and Vertical Lines(B

     WordPerfect's Graphics feature allows you to create hori-
zontal and vertical lines (rules) of various thicknesses. Use
these lines instead of those created with the Line Draw feature
when you need to draw rules that use a proportionally spaced font,
as lines created with Line Draw will not print correctly unless
you are using a monospaced font (see Line Draw). To draw a rule in
the document, position the cursor on the line where you want the
rule to start and follow the key sequence.
     WordPerfect can draw either a vertical line that extends up
and down part of or the entire length of the page, or a horizontal
line that extends across part of or the entire width of the page.
After selecting the type of line you want, you are presented with
line options that allow you to specify the horizontal position
(and vertical position, if you are creating a vertical line), the
length of the line, its thickness, and the amount of gray shading
to be applied to it (100% is black).
     When specifying the horizontal position of a horizontal line,
you can have it aligned with the left or right margin or centered
between them. You can also position the line by entering an offset
measurement from the left edge of the page, or have it extend from
the left to the right margin.
     When specifying the horizontal position for a vertical line,
you can have it drawn slightly ahead of the left margin or after
the right margin, or drawn between columns (indicated by number).
You can also position the line by entering an offset measurement
from the left edge of the page. You can specify the vertical
position of the line as centered between the top and bottom
margins (Full Page), aligned with either the top or bottom margin,
or placed at a specific distance from the top of the page.
     Use the Length of Line option to determine how long the rule
is to be. If you have specified a horizontal rule whose position
is Left and Right, the line length is automatically calculated by
the margin settings. For other horizontal lines, the default
length (which you can override) is determined by the cursor's
position when you created the line.
     The Width of Line option allows you to specify how thick the
line is to be. To enter this measurement in points, even if the
measurement is given in inches by default, follow the number with
a p.
     The Gray Shading option allows you to draw rules in other
gradations that are not totally black. To decrease the contrast of
the line, enter a percentage (10% is the lowest shading you can
specify).

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Advance
     Columns, Text (Newspaper and Parallel)
     Cross-Reference
     Equations (Version 5.1)
     Line Draw
     List Files
     Lists
     Print Quality
     Rewriting of Screen
     Spreadsheets
     Styles
     View Document

A)Hard Return(A

     Terminates paragraphs and short lines or enters blank lines.

B)Key Sequence(B

          ─┘ (Enter)

B)Usage(B

     Use the Enter key (─┘) to terminate a paragraph of text or a
short line that does not extend as far as the right margin, or to
add blank lines to a document. When you press ─┘, WordPerfect
places an invisible hard return in the document, shown by the code
[HRt] in the Reveal Codes screen.
     When entering the text of a paragraph, you don't need to
press ─┘ to begin a new line as you do when using a typewriter.
WordPerfect automatically wraps text that extends beyond the right
margin to the next line. At the end of a line where word wrap
occurs, the program inserts a soft return, whose code appears as
[SRt] in the Reveal Codes screen.
     To separate text into two paragraphs, place the cursor on the
first character of the section you want to appear as a new
paragraph and press ─┘. (It doesn't matter whether you are in
Insert or Typeover mode.) To join two paragraphs, locate the
cursor at the beginning of the second paragraph and press the
Backspace key to delete the [HRt] code. To use a hard return
character that is visible on the screen, use the Edit-Screen
options on the Setup menu (Version 5.1).

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Hard Space
     Leading
     Page Break, Soft and Hard
     Text In/Out
     Typeover

A)Hard Space(A

     Prevents words from being separated by word wrap.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Home-spacebar

B)Usage(B

     The hard space, entered between two words by pressing the
Home key before pressing the spacebar, prevents WordPerfect from
separating those words by word wrap. It can be used as the space
character in any phrase that should never be separated by word
wrap. A hard space code appears as [ ] in the Reveal Codes
screen. To convert a hard space to a regular space (subject to
word wrap), locate this code, delete it, and press the spacebar.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Protect
     Codes
     Hard Return
     Hyphenation

A)Headers and Footers(A

     Enters running heads at the top or bottom of the pages of
your document.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Page
           Headers or Footers
           Header A; Header B or Footer A; Footer B
           Discontinue; Every Page; Odd Pages; Even Pages; Edit
           [enter or edit text of header or footer]
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect allows you to create up to two different headers
(running heads printed at the top of the page) and two different
footers (running heads printed at the bottom of the page) in your
document. You can have these headings printed on every page, or
just on even or odd pages of the document. Before adding a header
or footer to your document (as outlined in the key sequence),
position the cursor at the top of the first page on which you want
the header or footer to appear.
     You can create two headers or footers if you want their text
to alternate on even- and odd-numbered pages of a bound document.
When using two headers or footers on every page, you can place one
flush left and the other flush right or place them on separate
lines.
     After selecting the number and type of the header or footer
you are creating, you are presented with a full editing screen on
which to enter the text. You can use as many lines as you need.
You can also add any text enhancements (such as boldface or a new
font) or formatting (such as centering or flush right). To insert
automatic page numbering into your headers and footers, press
Ctrl-B (or Ctrl-N) at the position where you want the page number
to appear.
     Headers begin printing on the first line below the top
margin, and WordPerfect places 0.16" between the last line of the
header and the body of the text. Footers begin printing on the
first line above the bottom margin, and the program places 0.16"
between the first line of the footer and the body of the text.
     To see how your headers and footers will appear when printed,
use the View Document feature (see View Document). To discontinue
a header or footer from a specific page to the end of the
document, select the Discontinue option after selecting the
appropriate header or footer on the Page menu. To suppress a
header or footer on a specific page, use the Suppress (This Page
Only) option (see Suppress Page Format). To edit the text of a
header, select its header or footer number and use the Edit option
on the Header or Footer menu. To delete a header or footer, locate
and delete the [Header/Footer:] code associated with it.
WordPerfect displays the first 50 characters of the header or
footer in the Reveal Codes screen.
     In version 5.1, you can use columns in headers and footers.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Columns, Text (Newspaper and Parallel)
     Exit
     Footnotes and Endnotes
     Force Odd/Even Page
     Margins, Top and Bottom
     Page Numbering
     Suppress Page Format
     View Document

A)Help(A

     Gives you online help about a function key or WordPerfect
command.

B)Key Sequence--Getting Help on Function Keys(B

          F3 or Help pull-down then Help or Index
           <function key or combination>
           ─┘ or spacebar

B)Key Sequence--Getting Help on Commands(B

          F3 or Help pull-down then Help or Index
           <first letter of the command>
           ─┘ or spacebar

B)Key Sequence--Displaying the Function-Key Template(B

          F3 F3 or Help pull-down then Template
           ─┘ or spacebar

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect's online help is available any time you are
working with the program. To get help about the use of a
particular function key or key combination, press F3 (Help), or
choose Help or Index from the Help pull-down menu, and then press
those function keys. To get help about a particular feature by
name, press F3 or use the pull-down sequence indicated, followed
by the initial letter of the feature name (such as S to get help
on Styles). When a letter has more than one Help screen, type 1
(in version 5.0) or the letter itself (in version 5.1) to display
another screen of entries for that letter. After locating the name
of the feature on the Help screen, press the function keys
indicated to obtain information about the feature's use.
     Version 5.1 has context-sensitive help. When you are using a
particular function, you can get more information about it by
pressing F3 or selecting Help from the pull-down menu (when
available).
     To display a diagram of the function-key assignments in
WordPerfect, press F3 twice or choose Template from the Help menu
if you are using pull-down menus. To exit from Help, press ─┘ or
the spacebar (pressing F1--Cancel--simply gives you a screen of
help on the Cancel feature).

A)Hyphenation(A

     Hyphenates words according to WordPerfect's hyphenation
rules, either automatically or at your discretion.

B)Key Sequence--Turning Hyphenation On or Off(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout
           Line
           Hyphenation No (Yes)
           F7 (Exit)

     Note: In version 5.0, the key sequence differs as follows:

           Hyphenation
           Off; Manual; Auto

B)Key Sequence--Changing the Hyphenation Zone(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Line
           Hyphenation Zone Left <left zone %> ─┘ Right <right
          zone %> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     Versions of WordPerfect prior to 5.1 followed an algorithm (a
mathematical "best guess") to determine where to hyphenate a word.
Version 5.1 has two hyphenation dictionaries, one internal and one
external. The external dictionary is much larger than the
internal. You can specify which of these dictionaries to use. If
you select the external dictionary, you must have installed the
Speller and Thesaurus.
     The default setting for WordPerfect's Hyphenation feature is
off. To use Hyphenation, you must turn it on. In version 5.0, you
must also choose between manual and automatic hyphenation, as
outlined in the key sequence.
     WordPerfect uses three different types of hyphens:

       ■  Soft hyphens, which the program enters; these are not
          printed if the document is edited and the word no longer
          requires hyphenation.
       ■  Hard hyphens, which you enter by pressing the hyphen key
          (-). These will appear on the screen and in print
          whenever the word appears. A line can break after a hard
          hyphen.
       ■  Nonbreaking hyphens, which you specify by pressing Home
          and then the hyphen key. This prevents a hyphenated word
          from being split between two lines.

     You can insert soft hyphens by pressing Ctrl and the hyphen
key or by using the program's Hyphenation feature.
     With manual hyphenation (Version 5.0), WordPerfect will beep
each time a word extends beyond the right margin and starts at or
before the left hyphenation zone. You will then see the prompt
"Position hyphen; Press ESC." By pressing Esc, you can see the
word as WordPerfect will hyphenate it to the right of this prompt.
You can change the place where the word is hyphenated by using the
arrow keys to position the hyphen where you want the word to
break, and then pressing Esc. If you do not want the word to be
hyphenated, press F1 (Cancel).
     When automatic hyphenation is on (Version 5.0), WordPerfect
will hyphenate any word that starts at or before the hyphenation
zone and extends beyond the right margin, without giving you a
chance to change the place where it is hyphenated.
     The Hyphenation Zone option on the Line format menu is used
to change the settings that determine how often WordPerfect will
hyphenate a word. If a word begins before or at the left zone
boundary and continues past the right boundary, WordPerfect will
either prompt you for a place to insert the hyphen or will
immediately hyphenate the word, depending on the type of
hyphenation you are using.
     The zone boundaries are set as a percentage of the line
length. This means that the default setting of 10% for the left
boundary is 0.6" and that of 4% for the right boundary is 0.24",
if the line length is currently 6". To have WordPerfect hyphenate
more frequently, decrease the size of the hyphenation zone. To
hyphenate less frequently, increase the size.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Hard Space
     Justification
     Language
     Speller
     Text In/Out
     Thesaurus

A)Indent(A

     Sets a temporary left margin and aligns all text to this
indent until you press ─┘.

B)Key Sequence(B

          F4 (Indent)
          or Layout pull-down then Align then Indent
           <text> ─┘

B)Usage(B

     For a left indent, select F4 Indent at the beginning of
your paragraph, or choose Align, then Indent from the Layout
menu. The paragraph is then indented ½ inch from the left margin,
or to the measurement of the first tab stop if you have reset
tabs. Select Indent a second time to indent the paragraph 1
inch (or to the next tab stop), a third time to indent it 1½
inches, and so forth.
     If you select Indent at the beginning of an existing
paragraph, it will be reformatted. If you select Indent at the
beginning of a paragraph you are typing, it will be indented as
you type until you press ─┘ to signal the beginning of a new
paragraph. To indent only the first line in a paragraph, use the
Tab key.
     To remove an indentation, locate and delete the [Indent]
code in the Reveal Codes screen.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Decimal/Align Character
     Indent
     Margin Release
     Margins, Left and Right
     Tab Align
     Tabs

A)Indent(A

     Sets temporary left and right margins and aligns all text to
these indents until you press ─┘.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F4 (Indent)
          or Layout pull-down then Align then Indent
           <text> ─┘

B)Usage(B

     For a left and right indent, select Indent. The
paragraph will be indented ½ inch from the left and right margins,
or to the first tab setting for both sides. Continuing to select
Indent will indent the paragraph in increments of ½ inch
or to the tab settings. To delete a left and right indent, locate
and delete the [Indent] code in the Reveal Codes screen.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Decimal/Align Character
     Indent
     Margin Release
     Margins, Left and Right
     Tab Align
     Tabs

A)Indexes(A

     Generates an index from entries marked in the document or
stored in a concordance file.

B)Key Sequence-Marking an Entry for the Index(B

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight text to be indexed]
           Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Index
           Index Heading: ─┘ or <index heading> ─┘
           Subheading: ─┘ or <subheading> ─┘

B)Key Sequence-Defining the Style of the Index(B

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Define
           Define Index
           Concordance Filename (Enter=none): ─┘ or <filename>
          ─┘
           No Page Numbers; Page Numbers Follow Entries; (Page
          Numbers) Follow Entries; Flush Right Page Numbers; Flush
          Right Page Numbers with Leaders

B)Key Sequence-Generating an Index(B

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Generate
           Generate Tables, Indexes, Automatic References, etc.
           Existing tables, lists, and indexes will be
          replaced. Continue? Yes (N) ─┘ (or press any key except
          N)

B)Usage--General(B

     To create an index, you must first mark the items to be
included in it, then define its style and generate it. To mark
items for an index:

       1. Locate the word or phrase you wish to include in the
          index. Position the cursor on it or on the space
          following it. If you are indexing a phrase, you must
          first mark it by pressing Alt-F4 (Block) and
          highlighting the phrase.
       2. Press Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or use the Mark pull-down menu
          and then select the Index option. The prompt "Index
          Heading:" appears. This prompt is followed by the phrase
          you marked or the word the cursor is on. If you want the
          entry to appear in the index just as it does where it is
          highlighted, press ─┘. WordPerfect automatically
          capitalizes the first letter of an index heading, and it
          lowercases subheading entries unless the word was
          capitalized in the text. If you want the word or phrase
          to appear differently in the index, type it or edit it
          as you wish it to appear.
       3. The program then prompts you for a subheading. If you
          accepted the default word or phrase as the heading,
          you can type a subheading or simply press ─┘ for no
          subheading. If you entered a different word or phrase
          for the heading, WordPerfect will present that word or
          phrase as the default subheading. You can press ─┘ to
          accept it, type over the word WordPerfect presents and
          substitute the one you wish to use, or delete the
          subheading if you do not want one.
       4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each word or phrase you want to
          include in your index.

B)Usage--Creating a Concordance File(B

     A concordance file is simply a list of all the words and
phrases that you wish WordPerfect to search for and mark as index
entries. To use a concordance file, you specify its file name when
you define the style of your index.
     To create a concordance file, you need to start a new
document and enter the words or phrases you want to use in the
index as headings or as subheadings. Press ─┘ after you enter
each one. Then, if you are using subheadings, go back and mark
each entry with the appropriate index marks by pressing Alt-F5
(Mark Text) or using the Mark pull-down menu and selecting the
Index option (you will need to mark phrases as blocks first);
otherwise, all entries will be headings. You can then generate the
index.

B)Usage--Defining the Style of an Index(B

     WordPerfect allows you to choose among several formatting
styles for the indexes it generates. To define the style for an
index, place the cursor where the index should appear and follow
the steps outlined in the key sequence. After you select the
Define and Index options, you will be prompted for a concordance
file name. Type a name if you are using one; otherwise, press ─┘.
     Then select a numbering style from the menu that appears. A
[Def Mark] code is inserted in the document when you press F7
(Exit) after selecting a numbering style for the index. This marks
the position where the index will be generated. If you want a
columnar index, you must insert the column codes and turn the
Columns feature on in the text (with Alt-F7) just before the
[DefMark:Index] code.

B)Usage--Generating Tables, Lists, and Indexes(B

     After marking the index entries and indicating the style of
the index, you are ready to generate the index. Select first the
Generate option and then the Generate Tables, Indexes, Automatic
References, etc. option. WordPerfect will tell you that the
existing tables, lists, and indexes will be replaced. To have
WordPerfect generate the index, choose Y or press any key besides
N. If you need to save a previously generated index for the
document, choose N. The index is generated at the [Def Mark] code
in the document, and the program automatically inserts an [End
Def] mark at the end of the index.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Columns, Text (Newspaper and Parallel)
     Lists
     Mark Text
     Master Document
     Tables of Contents

A)Justification(A

     Specifies the type of justification in the document. In
version 5.0, turns on or off right justification only.

B)Key Sequence--Specifying Justification Type(B

     To specify the type of justification from the function-key
menu system in version 5.1:

          Shift-F8 (Format)
           Line
           Justification
           Left; Center; Right; Full
           F7 (Exit)

     Note: In the pull-down menu system, you select Layout then
Justify to reach the four justification options.

B)Key Sequence-Turning Justification On or Off(B

     To turn on or off justification in a document (Version 5.0):

          Shift-F8 (Format)
           Line
           Justification N or Y
           F7 (Exit)

B)Key Sequence-Changing Word Spacing(B

     To compress or expand the word spacing:

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Other
           Printer Functions
           Word Spacing Justification Limits
          Compressed to (0%-100%) <compression %> ─┘
          Expanded to (100%-unlimited) <expansion %> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     By default, full justification (called simply justification
in WordPerfect 5.0) is on when you begin a new document. This
means that the program will align the right margin of each line by
adjusting the spacing between its words. The program can't display
justification on the editing screen (the right margin always
appears ragged right). To see justification and the spacing
between words in each line, use View Document.
     You can turn off justification for the entire document
(position the cursor at the beginning of the document) or just
part of it (position the cursor in the document where you want the
change to begin) by following the steps indicated in the step
sequence. In version 5.1, you can also turn off justification for
all documents by using the Setup menu.
     WordPerfect provides two methods for controlling the spacing
between words when justification is used. You can turn on
WordPerfect's Hyphenation feature and adjust the size of the
hyphenation zone (see Hyphenation) to reduce the amount of space
between words. This is especially useful when you have a short
line length, as when using newspaper and parallel columns (see
Columns, Text). You can also adjust the word spacing from the
Printer Functions menu (as indicated in the sequence of steps).
The Word Spacing Justification Limits option allows you to modify
the minimum and maximum range within which WordPerfect can fit
justified text. With a proportionally spaced font, the optimal
spacing between words is built into the font (expressed by
percentage as 100%). Use the Compressed To option to set the
minimum word spacing percentage and the Expanded To option to set
the maximum word spacing percentage allowed. When one of these
limits is reached, WordPerfect begins to adjust the spacing
between letters in the words themselves (see Word/Letter Spacing).

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Columns, Text (Newspaper and Parallel)
     Hyphenation
     Kerning
     View Document
     Word/Letter Spacing

A)Kerning(A

     Turns on or off automatic kerning, which tightens the letter
spacing between specific pairs of letters in a font.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout
           Other
           Printer Functions
           Kerning No (Yes)
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     Kerning reduces space between specific letter pairs in a
font, working from the cursor's position forward in the document.
     When you turn kerning on in a document, WordPerfect inserts a
[Kern:On] code at the cursor's position. If you decide not to use
kerning in the final printed document, locate and delete this code
in the Reveal Codes screen.
     Version 5.1 allows you to see the letter pairs that are most
often kerned in the base font you are using by retrieving the
KERN.TST file and printing it.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Justification
     Word/Letter Spacing

A)Labels (Version 5.1)(A

     Allows you to print mailing labels.

B)Key Sequence--Setting Up a Mailing Label Size(B

          Shift-F8 or Layout pull-down
           Page
           Paper Size/Type
           Add
           Labels
           Labels Yes
           Label Size; Number of Labels; Top Left Corner;
          Distance between Labels; Label Margins
           F7 (Exit) four times

B)Key Sequence-Using a Defined Label Size(B

          Shift-F8 or Layout pull-down
           Page
           Paper Size/Type [highlight label definition]
           Select
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect 5.1 provides a Labels feature to help you set up
formats for mailing labels, envelopes, and documents that require
special paper sizes and types. (This feature was called Forms in
version 5.0.) The program also provides a macro named LABELS that
automatically presents you with many standard mailing-label sizes
from which you can choose directly, without having to set up a
special paper size.
     When you enter measurements for labels by following the key
sequence, you must be sure to enter accurate dimensions. Enter the
width and height of an individual label for the Label Size option.
For Number of Labels, enter the number of columns of labels
(across) and the number of rows (down). Measure the top left
corner on your sheet of labels; if they start at that point, enter
0" and 0" as the measurements. For the Distance between Labels
entry, measure the distance between two labels, not the distance
between the top and bottom labels on the page. If there is no
space between labels, enter 0" and 0". The Label Margins option
lets you enter the left, right, top, and bottom margins for
individual labels, not for the entire sheet of labels.
     If you are using tractor-fed labels, enter the top left
corner measurement as 0", 0". Treat each row of labels as a sheet,
so the number of rows is 1 and the number of columns is the number
of labels in a row. Enter the paper size as the width of the
label. The height should include the distance between the labels.
     Once you have set up a paper size for your labels, press F7
twice to return to the Paper Size/Type menu; then select that size
by press ─┘ with the highlight cursor on the size you want to
use. A [Paper Sz/Type:] code will be inserted in your document at
that point, and you can begin typing text for the labels. The code
must be at the top of the page for it to take effect on that page.
     When you type the text of your labels, press Ctrl-─┘ (Page
Break) to separate each one.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Forms (Version 5.0)
     Merge Operations
     Page Break, Soft and Hard
     Paper Size/Type

A)Language(A

     Allows you to switch between different language versions of
the spelling, thesaurus, and hyphenation dictionaries.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Other
           Language <language code> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect comes with an English-language version of the
spelling and thesaurus dictionaries. You can, however, purchase
foreign-language versions of these dictionaries, as well as
special hyphenation dictionaries, from WordPerfect Corporation. To
have WordPerfect use one of these versions instead of English, you
must change the language code default from US (EN in version 5.0)
to the appropriate code. With version 5.1, press F3 when your
cursor is on the US code (or choose Help from the pull-down menu)
to see a list of the codes that WordPerfect uses.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Hyphenation
     Speller--General
     Thesaurus

A)Leading(A

     Allows you to change the amount of white space between lines
of text.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout
           Other
           Printer Functions
           Leading Adjustment
           <enter amount of primary leading> ─┘
           <enter amount of secondary leading> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     Leading is the amount of space added between lines of type to
make it more readable. WordPerfect normally adds two points of
space between lines of text that are set in a proportional font
(such as Helvetica or Times Roman), and no leading to lines of
text in a nonproportional font (such as Courier), since a fixed
amount of leading is built into nonproportional fonts. You can
change the amount of leading both between lines of text separated
by a soft return and lines separated by a hard return, which begin
a new paragraph.
     To change the leading you are using, follow the step sequence
outlined above, choose Leading Adjustment and enter the amount of
space you want to have between lines (Primary) and between
paragraphs (Secondary). Since leading is usually measured in
points, you may want to enter the value followed by a p (such as
4p) if your units of measurement are in inches, which is the
default. Otherwise, WordPerfect will interpret the value you enter
as a leading specification in inches.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Hard Return
     Line Height
     Line Spacing
     Word/Letter Spacing

A)Line Draw(A

     Allows you to draw straight lines and boxes in the document.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F3 (Screen) or Tools pull-down
           Line Draw
           │; ║; *; Change; Erase; Move
           F7 (Exit) or F1 (Cancel)

B)Usage(B

     To draw simple graphics in WordPerfect, select Line Draw from
either the Screen menu (Ctrl-F3) or the Tools pull-down menu. When
you are in WordPerfect's Line Draw mode, the following menu
appears:

          1 │; 2 ║; 3 *; 4 Change; 5 Erase; 6 Move: 1

     When you are in Line Draw mode, the option you have selected
appears at the end of the menu line. Selecting the first three
options allows you to draw single lines, double lines, or
asterisks. Selecting Change allows you to choose up to eight
different types of alternate drawing characters. In addition, you
can use any of the characters that your printer can print (see
Compose). If you select Erase, the cursor will erase each
character it passes through. Selecting Move allows you to move the
cursor through your drawing without changing anything.
     To enter text in drawings you have created, you should be in
Typeover mode. If you remain in Insert mode, which is
WordPerfect's default setting, lines will be pushed to the right
as you type, and pressing ─┘, Tab, or the spacebar will insert
spaces into your graphics. You can also type text for your
graphics first, then enter Line Draw mode and draw lines around
the text you have already entered.
     To exit from Line Draw mode and enter text, press F7 (Exit)
or F1 (Cancel). Pressing F1 does not erase any drawings you have
created.
     Note: When creating horizontal and vertical rules for a
desktop publishing application, use the Line option on the
Graphics menu (Alt-F9), rather than the Line Draw feature.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Compose
     Graphics
     Typeover

A)Line Height(A

     Allows you to fix the amount of space placed between the
baseline of one line and the baseline of the next line in the
document.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Line
           Line Height
           Auto; Fixed <distance between baselines> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect automatically adjusts the line height--that is,
the measurement from the baseline of one line of text to the
baseline of the following line of text--to accommodate the largest
font used in the line. To override this automatic adjustment and
enter a fixed line height for all of the lines in a part or all of
the document, use the Line Height option on the Line format menu.
After you select Fixed, enter the distance between baselines,
measured in points, inches, or centimeters. If you enter the
number of points, and inches is the default unit of measurement,
be sure to end the number with p--WordPerfect will automatically
convert this number into corresponding inches.
     When you change the line height measurement, WordPerfect
inserts a [Ln Height:] code in the document at the cursor's
position. The line height will then be changed from that point
forward in the document, although the difference in the line
spacing will not be visible on the editing screen. (To see the
effect that changing the line height has on your text, use View
Document.) To return to automatic line height, position the cursor
at the beginning of the line where the new line height is to
begin, repeat the key sequence, and select the Auto option.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Font
     Leading
     Line Spacing
     Margins, Top and Bottom
     View Document

A)Line Numbering(A

     Numbers the lines in the printed version of the document.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout
           Line
           Line Numbering Y
           Count Blank Lines; Number Every n Lines, where n is;
          Position of Number from Left Edge; Starting Number;
          Restart Numbering on Each Page
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect allows you to specify that lines be automatically
numbered in the documents you create. Although the line numbers do
not appear on the editing screen, they will be present when your
document is printed or when you preview it (see View Document).
     To number the lines in a document, move the cursor to the
first position at the top of the page where you want line
numbering to begin. To turn on line numbering at the cursor
position, follow the step sequence shown above and type Y after
choosing the Line Numbering option. To turn line numbering off,
type N in response to this option. You can also locate and delete
the [Ln Num:On] code in the Reveal Codes screen.
     When you turn on line numbering, you are presented with five
options, which are discussed below.
     You can select whether to include blank lines in the line
count. If you want blank lines to be skipped, select the Count
Blank Lines option and type N. WordPerfect automatically includes
blank lines as it numbers lines unless you tell it not to. The
count does not include blank lines in double-spaced text, however.
     The Number Every n Lines, where n is option allows you to
specify the increment for line numbering. For example, if you want
to number only every fifth line, enter 5; WordPerfect will count
all the lines but will number only lines 5, 10, 15, 20, and so
forth.
     The Position of Number from Left Edge option allows you to
indicate where you want WordPerfect to print the line numbers.
Enter the distance from the left edge of the page in inches.
     WordPerfect begins line numbering with 1 on each new page
unless you change the Starting Number option and enter a new
starting number.
     If you want line numbering to continue sequentially
throughout your document, enter N for the Restart Numbering on
Each Page option.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Outlining
     Paragraph Numbering
     View Document

A)Line Spacing(A

     Allows you to set the line spacing.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout
           Line
           Line Spacing <spacing number> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     The default for WordPerfect is single spacing. To change to
another spacing from the cursor's position forward in the
document, place the cursor where you want the new spacing to begin
and follow the key sequence. You can enter the spacing number in
half-line increments (such as 1.5). WordPerfect displays double
spacing (and larger whole number spacing such as triple,
quadruple, and so on) on the screen. To return to the default of
single spacing, locate and delete the [Ln Spacing:] code in the
Reveal Codes screen.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Leading
     Line Height

A)List Files(A

     Allows you to obtain an alphabetical listing of all of the
files in the current directory and perform common maintenance
tasks on them.

B)Key Sequence(B

          F5 (List Files) ─┘ or File pull-down then List
          Files ─┘
           Retrieve; Delete; Move/Rename; Print; Short/Long
          Display; Look; Other Directory; Copy; Find; Name Search
           F1 (Cancel) or F7 (Exit) or Esc or zero (0)

     Note: In version 5.0, Short/Long Display is replaced by Text
In, and Find is replaced by Word Search.

B)Usage--General(B

     List Files (F5) allows you to obtain a directory listing of
files, retrieve or print a particular document, or make a new data
directory or drive current. In addition, you can carry out many
tasks that you would otherwise have to do in DOS, such as deleting
and renaming files, creating directories, and copying files to a
new disk or directory. See Retrieve; Deleting Files; Move/Rename
Files; Printing from List Files; Short/Long Document Names
(Version 5.1); Directories; Copying Files; Find (5.1); Name
Search.
     When you press F5 or choose List Files from the File pull-
down menu, WordPerfect displays the path name of the current
directory at the bottom of the editing screen. If you press ─┘,
it will display a new screen showing an alphabetical list of all
program files in that directory as well as the List Files menu.
     In version 5.1, you can view an alternate List Files screen
called Long Display. The right-hand side of this screen lists
files in a directory by their original eight-character DOS names;
the left-hand side displays any long document names and document
types you have assigned as well as any directory aliases (see
Directories). To choose Long Display, select Short/Long Display
from the List Files menu; then select Long Display. To return to
the short display, select Short Display. To retrieve a document by
using its long document name, you must use the List Files screen.
See Short/Long Document Names for more information about Long
Display and document types.
     To move through the list of file names on the List Files
screen, use the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, PgUp, and PgDn keys. To move
directly to the last file name in the list, press Home Home Down
Arrow. To move to the first file, press Home Home Up Arrow. To
move between columns, use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys.
     To locate a particular file quickly, type N and start typing
the first few characters of its name to activate the Name Search
feature. The program tries to match the letters entered with files
in the listing and moves the highlight directly to the first
match. Press ─┘ or one of the arrow keys to exit from Name
Search.
     To view the contents of a different directory, edit the
displayed path name or enter another path name. If you will be
working in a different directory during the current session, you
can change the default directory (see Directories). Once you have
made a particular directory current, all of the documents you
create and save will automatically be located in it.
     Press Esc, F1 (Cancel), 0, or F7 (Exit) to return to your
document after viewing the List Files screen.
     In WordPerfect 5.1, you can press F5 (List Files) to display
the contents of a directory when you are importing a spreadsheet
(see Spreadsheet) and when you are retrieving a graphic image (see
Graphics).

B)Usage--Looking at Files and Directories(B

     The Look option is the default setting on the List Files
menu. It allows you to display the contents of the file whose name
is currently highlighted. This feature is helpful when you need to
view the contents of a file to see if it is the document you want
to edit or print.
     When you highlight the name of a file and press ─┘ (or
choose the Look option), WordPerfect displays the first part of
the document on the screen. If you have added a document summary
to the file, you will see its statistics at the top of the screen.
You can scroll through the document using any of the standard
cursor keys. To view the next or previous file in the directory
listing, choose Next Doc or Previous Doc.
     In version 5.1, if the file you are looking at has a document
summary, it will be displayed first, and you will see the
following menu:

          1 Next; 2 Previous; 3 Look at Text, 4 Print Summary; 5
          Save to File

Choose Look at Text to look at the text of the document. To print
the summary, choose Print Summary; you can also save it as a
separate file by choosing Save to File. To return to the List
Files menu after viewing the contents of the file, press F7
(Exit).
     You can also use the Look option to temporarily view a new
directory and locate the documents listed there. Highlight the
name of the directory whose listing you wish to see and press ─┘
(or choose Look and press ─┘), or double-click with the mouse.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Copying Files
     Deleting Files
     Directories
     Document Summary
     Find (5.1)
     Graphics
     Move/Rename File
     Name Search
     Printing from List Files
     Retrieve
     Short/Long Document Names (Version 5.1)
     Text In/Out

A)Lists(A

     Generates lists of figures, tables, and so on, from marked
entries in your document.

B)Key Sequence--Marking an Entry for the List(B

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight text to be listed]
           Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           List
           <list number between 1 and 5>

B)Key Sequence--Defining the Style of the List(B

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Define
           Define List
           <list number between 1 and 10>
           No Page Numbers; Page Numbers Follow Entries; (Page
          Numbers) Follow Entries; Flush Right Page Numbers; Flush
          Right Page Numbes with Leaders

B)Key Sequence--Generating a List(B

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Generate
           Generate Tables, Indexes, Automatic References, etc.
           Existing tables, lists, and indexes will be
          replaced. Continue? Yes (No) ─┘ (or press any key
          except N)

B)Usage--General(B

     You can mark up to five separate lists in a document, but an
item may belong to only one list. For each item that you want to
include in a list, follow these steps:

       1. Press Alt-F4 (or choose Block from the Edit menu) and
          use the cursor-movement keys or the mouse to mark the
          list item as a block.
       2. Press Alt-F5 (Mark Text), then select the List option.
       3. When the "List#" prompt appears, enter the number of the
          list (from 1 to 5).

     When you mark a list entry with this method, WordPerfect
places [Mark:List,#] and [End Mark:List,#] codes around the marked
text. To delete the entry from the list, you need only to locate
and delete the [Mark:List #] code for that entry in the Reveal
Codes screen.
     In addition to the five lists you mark yourself, WordPerfect
automatically maintains separate predefined lists of the captions
for figures, tables, text boxes, user-defined boxes, and equations
(Version 5.1) created with the Graphics feature (see Graphics);
they are assigned the list numbers 6 through 10, respectively. For
example, to create a list composed of all of the captions for the
text boxes in a document, you simply define the style and generate
list 8. There is no need to mark individual captions.

B)Usage--Defining the Style of the List(B

     WordPerfect allows you to choose among several formatting
styles for the lists it generates. To define the style for a list,
follow the steps as outlined in the key sequence. After you select
the Define and Define List options, and indicate the number of the
list (1-10), you select the option number corresponding to the
style you wish to use.
     A [Def Mark:] code is inserted in the document when you press
F7 (Exit) after selecting a style for the list. This marks the
position where the list will be generated. Therefore, most often
you will want to position the cursor at the end of the document
before you define the list style to have it generated there.

B)Usage--Generating Tables, Lists, and Indexes(B

     After marking the list entries (if you are creating a list
from 1-5) and indicating the style of the list, you are ready to
generate it. After you select the Generate option and the Generate
Tables, Indexes, Automatic References, etc. option, WordPerfect
will tell you that existing tables, lists, and indexes will
be replaced.
     To have WordPerfect generate the list, choose Y or press any
key besides N. If you have previously generated an index for the
document, it will be completely replaced unless you choose N. The
list is generated at the [Def Mark] code in the document, and the
program automatically inserts an [End Def] mark at the end of the
list.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Graphics
     Indexes
     Margins, Top and Bottom
     Mark Text
     Tables
     Tables of Contents

A)Locking a File(A

     Allows you to protect a document with a password.

B)Key Sequence--Adding or Changing a Password(B

          Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out) then Password
          or File pull-down then Password
           Add/Change
           <password> ─┘
           <password> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Deleting a Password(B

          Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out) then Password
          or File pull-down then Password
           Remove

B)Usage(B

     To lock the file displayed on the screen, follow the key
sequence and select Add/Change. You will then be prompted to enter
the password twice. The password can contain up to 24 characters.
WordPerfect does not display the password on the screen, so it
asks you to enter it twice to protect against typing errors. If
the password you enter is not the same each time, you will receive
an error message and must begin the file-locking procedure again.
     As soon as you save the document after assigning a password,
it will be saved with the document. Thereafter, you will have to
enter the password in order to retrieve, copy, move, or rename the
document as well as to print it from disk. If you cannot enter the
password correctly, you will never be able to retrieve or print it
again.
     Once you have retrieved a locked file, you can edit it just
like any other WordPerfect document. To remove a password from a
file after retrieving, press Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out) and select
Password; then Remove. The next time you save the document, it
will be saved without the password, which will no longer be
required when you retrieve the file or print it from disk.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Text In/Out

A)Macros(A

     Enables you to record keystrokes and replay them at any time
by entering the macro name under which they are stored.

B)Key Sequence--Defining a Macro(B

          Ctrl-F10 (Macro Define)
          or Tools pull-down then Macro then Define
           <macro name> ─┘
           <description of macro> ─┘
           <keystrokes to be recorded> ─┘
           Ctrl-F10 (Macro Define)

B)Key Sequence--Editing an Existing Macro(B

          Ctrl-F10 (Macro Define)
          or Tools pull-down then Macro then Define
           <macro name> ─┘
           Edit
           [edit keystrokes as required]
           F7 (Exit)

B)Key Sequence--Replacing an Existing Macro(B

          Ctrl-F10 (Macro Define)
          or Tools pull-down then Macro then Define
           <macro name> ─┘
           Replace Y
           <new description of macro> ─┘
           <new keystrokes to be recorded>
           Ctrl-F10 (Macro Define)

B)Key Sequence--Executing an Alt-Key Macro(B

          Alt-<letter assigned to macro>

B)Key Sequence--Executing All Other Macros(B

          Alt-F10 (Macro)
          or Tools then Macro then Execute
           <macro name> ─┘

B)Usage--General(B

     A macro is a recorded sequence of keystrokes that you save in
a file and can use repeatedly. Macros can consist of text that you
do not want to retype, such as standard paragraphs in a contract
or form letter, or complex sequences of commands, such as those
that set up a document's format, save the document, and print it.
You can even combine text and commands within macros to automate
repetitious procedures such as locating and replacing formatting
codes throughout a document (see Search and Replace).
     You can set up macros that repeat themselves, as well as
macros that call other macros. In addition, you can specify that a
macro be executed only if a certain condition is met.

B)Usage--Creating Macros(B

     This section presents the rules you need to follow while
creating macros.
     To create a macro:

       1. Select Macro Define to begin the macro definition.
          WordPerfect will display the prompt "Define Macro:".
          Enter a macro name from one to eight characters long,
          with no spaces between characters, followed by ─┘, or
          press the Alt key in combination with a letter from A to
          Z, or simply press the Enter key (─┘).
       2. WordPerfect will then display the prompt "Description:".
          You can then enter a description of the macro's
          function, which can have up to 39 characters. Then press
          ─┘.
       3. WordPerfect then displays the prompt "Macro Def", which
          you'll see at the bottom of the screen until you
          terminate the macro definition. Enter all of the
          keystrokes that you want to include in the macro. Do not
          use the mouse to position the cursor in text; use the
          cursor keys instead.
       4. Select Macro Define a second time to terminate the macro
          definition. WordPerfect automatically saves the
          definition in a file. The program appends the extension
          .WPM to the end of the file name you assigned to the
          macro. Macro files are automatically saved in the
          directory that you indicate as the Keyboard/Macro Files
          directory or in the directory that contains the
          WordPerfect program files, if you haven't yet specified
          such a directory (see Directories).

B)Usage--Executing Macros(B

     To execute a macro whose name consists of one to eight
characters, select Alt-F10 or select Macro then Execute from the
Tools pull-down menu. WordPerfect displays the prompt "Macro:".
Enter the name of the macro and press ─┘.
     To execute a macro that uses the Alt key and a letter from A
to Z, you simply press Alt in combination with the letter key you
assigned to the macro.
     To execute a macro that was named with the Enter key (─┘),
press Alt-F10 and press ─┘. To terminate any macro before it is
finished, press F1 (Cancel).

B)Usage--Replacing and Editing Macros(B

     If a macro that you have defined does not work as you
intended, you can redefine or edit it. To do either, select Macro
Define and enter the same name you used when you originally
defined the macro. WordPerfect 5.1 will display the prompt

          <macro name>.WPM is Already Defined. 1 Replace; 2 Edit:
          0; 3 Description

where <macro name> is the name you entered. To redefine the macro,
select the Replace option, respond Yes to the prompt, and reenter
a new description and the keystrokes you want recorded. Press
Ctrl-F10 to terminate and save the new definition when you are
finished.
     To edit the contents of a macro, select the Edit option. This
takes you to the Macro Editor and places the cursor inside the
macro editing window, which displays the keystrokes already saved
in the macro.
     In WordPerfect 5.0, the Macro Editor has two options,
Description and Action. To change the macro's description, select
the Description option, edit the comment line, and press ─┘. To
edit the contents of the macro, select the Action option.
     Macro programming commands and standard WordPerfect editing
commands entered into the macro are both represented by a command
or feature name enclosed in a pair of braces. For example, you
might see the macro command {BELL}, which sounds the bell, or the
editing command {Underline}, which underlines text.
     To move the cursor, insert new text, or delete existing text
or codes in the Macro Editor, use the WordPerfect editing and
cursor-movement keys as usual (see Cursor Movement). However, to
add new WordPerfect commands to the macro, you must press Ctrl-V
or Ctrl-F10 (Macro Define) before you press the appropriate
function key(s). If you use Ctrl-F10 to enter the Function Key
mode, you must press it again to reenter Edit mode before you use
any of the editing or cursor-movement keys. Otherwise, WordPerfect
will insert their codes into the macro (such as {Left} when you
press Left Arrow) rather than performing their usual function (to
move the cursor one character to the left). To insert a macro
programming command into a macro, press Ctrl-PgUp. This displays a
list of programming commands that you can scroll through. Move the
highlight cursor to the command you wish to use and press ─┘ to
insert it into the macro.
     Once you have finished editing the contents of a macro, press
F7 (Exit) to save the new definition and return to the document
editing screen. Press F1 (Cancel) if you wish to abandon any
editing to the macro.

B)Usage--Enhancing Macros(B

     You can insert a pause into a macro so that you can enter
data from the keyboard while the macro is being executed. This
enables you to write a general macro that you can use to accept
variable data.
     To enter a pause for input into a macro, begin the definition
of the macro as described under "Creating Macros" and then press
Ctrl-PgUp at the point where you want to insert the pause. The
following menu options will appear at the bottom of the screen:

          1 Pause; 2 Display; 3 Assign; 4 Comment: 0

Select Pause and then press ─┘ and continue with the definition
of your macro. When you execute a macro that contains a pause (or
pauses) for input, the macro will execute all keystrokes up to the
place where you entered the pause and then beep to signal that it
has paused. To resume macro execution after you have entered your
text, press ─┘.
     To make a macro's operation visible on the screen, select the
Display option after pressing Ctrl-PgUp. The prompt "Display
execution? No (Yes)" will appear on the screen. Type Y to have the
menu options briefly displayed on the document editing screen as
WordPerfect commands are selected.

B)Usage--Chaining Macros(B

     A macro can be started from within another macro, or a macro
can be made to loop continuously by calling itself. To chain one
macro to another, enter the second macro's name at the end of the
first macro by pressing Alt-F10 followed by the name of the macro
(if you are chaining an Alt macro, you must still press Alt-F10
before pressing Alt and the appropriate letter). When two macros
are chained in this way, all of the keystrokes in the first macro
are executed before the keystrokes in the second are executed. By
including a search procedure to locate text that you want the
macro to process, you can make a macro automatically repeat until
it has operated on all occurrences of the search string (see
Search and Replace).

B)Usage--Nesting Macros(B

     You can nest an Alt macro inside another macro by pressing
Alt followed by the appropriate letter key (this time, don't press
Alt-F10 before you press Alt and the letter key). When an Alt
macro is nested inside another macro, WordPerfect executes the Alt
macro's commands as soon as it comes to its name in the sequence
of executing the commands in the first macro. After all of the
commands in the Alt macro have been executed, WordPerfect resumes
execution of any commands that come after the Alt macro name in
the original macro.
     Note: WordPerfect 5.0 macros will run under WordPerfect 5.1
if the keystrokes are the same; however, option numbers in some
menus have changed. For example, some of the options on the Setup
menu (Shift-F1) and the List Files screen (F5) have been
renumbered (see List Files), as has the option for the path for
downloadable fonts. If your 5.0 macro behaves erratically, edit it
in the macro editor to conform to the new key sequence.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Directories
     Go To DOS/Shell
     List Files
     Mouse (Version 5.1)
     Pull-Down Menus
     Search and Replace

A)Margin Release(A

     Moves the cursor one tab stop to the left of the left margin.

B)Key Sequence--Releasing the Margin(B

          Shift-Tab (Margin Release)
          or Layout pull-down then Align then Margin
          Rel

B)Key Sequence--Creating a Hanging Indent(B

          F4 (Indent) Shift-Tab (Margin Release)
          or Layout pull-down then Align then Indent
          then Layout then Align then Margin Rel

B)Usage(B

     To move the cursor one tab stop to the right, press the Tab
key. To move the cursor one tab stop to the left, select Margin
Release. When you use Margin Release to move left, WordPerfect
inserts a [Mar Rel] code in the document in front of the [Tab]
code. If you delete only the [Mar Rel] code, the [Tab] code
will remain, and any text will be indented to its stop.
     You can use Margin Release with Indent to create a hanging
indentation. To do this, press F4 to indent the paragraph, and then
press Shift-Tab to remove the indentation for the first line only.
Succeeding lines will be indented, as in the following example:

     Hanging indents are often useful to call attention to
          paragraphs in a series. Sometimes this style of
          indentation is referred to as an outdent.

     To delete a hanging indentation, locate and delete the
[Mar Rel] and [Indent] codes in the Reveal Codes screen.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Flush Right
     Indent
     Indent
     Tab Align
     Tabs

A)Margins, Left and Right(A

     Allows you to change the left and right margins of your
document.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Line
           Margins: Left <distance from left edge> ─┘; Right
          <distance from right edge> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     To change the left and right margins for a document, position
the cursor at the beginning of the line where you want the new
margins to begin and follow the key sequence. The left-margin
setting is the distance from the left edge of the paper, and the
right-margin setting is the distance from the right edge of the
paper. Any change to these settings takes effect from the cursor's
position forward in the document. To set new left and right
margins for the entire document, be sure that the cursor is at the
beginning of the file (press Home Home Up Arrow to get there)
before you change them.
     When you change the left- and right-margin settings in a
document, WordPerfect inserts an [L/R Mar:] code that includes
their new settings. To revert to the default 1" settings, locate
this code in the Reveal Codes screen and delete it.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Center
     Forms (Version 5.0)
     Indent
     Indent
     Margin Release
     Margins, Top and Bottom
     Paper Size/Type
     Tabs

A)Margins, Top and Bottom(A

     Allows you to change the top and bottom margins of your
document.

B)Key Sequence(B


          Shift-F8 (Format) Layout pull-down
           Page
           Margins: Top <distance from top edge> ─┘; Bottom
          <distance from bottom edge> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     To change the top and bottom margins for a document, position
the cursor at the beginning of the page where you want the margins
to change and follow the key sequence. The top-margin setting is
the distance from the top edge of the paper, and the bottom-margin
setting is the distance from the bottom edge of the paper. Any
change to these settings takes effect from the cursor's position
forward in the document. To set new top and bottom margins for the
entire document, be sure that the cursor is at the beginning of
the file (press Home Home Up Arrow to get there) before you change
them.
     WordPerfect maintains the top- and bottom-margin settings in
effect by automatically adjusting the number of lines per page
according to the fonts and line heights used. Therefore, there is
no need to change the top- and bottom-margin settings when you
change the sizes of fonts or the line height(s) in the document.
     When you change the top- and bottom-margin settings in a
document, WordPerfect inserts a [T/B Mar:] code that includes
their new settings. To revert to the default top- and bottom-
margin settings of 1" each, locate and delete this code in the
Reveal Codes screen.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Center Page (Top to Bottom)
     Forms (Version 5.0)
     Headers and Footers
     Line Height
     Lists
     Margins, Left and Right
     Paper Size/Type

A)Mark Text(A

     Compares documents, removes redline markings and strikeout
text, and creates automatic references, master documents, indexes,
lists, tables of authorities, and tables of contents.

B)Key Sequence--Accessing the Mark Text Menu(B

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Cross Ref; Subdoc; Index; ToA Short Form; Define;
          Generate

B)Key Sequence--Marking a Reference(B

     To mark a table of contents, list, index, or table of
authorities reference:

          Alt-F4 (Block) then [highlight text to be marked]
          then Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           ToC; List; Index; ToA

B)Usage(B

     Mark Text is used for automatic references, master documents,
document comparison, redline and strikeout removal, outlining,
paragraph numbering, indexes and concordances, and tables of
contents and authorities. When you press Alt-F5, or use the Mark
pull-down menu, you will see the options shown in the key
sequence. (If you're using the pull-down menu system,
you will also see the options Master Documents and Document
Compare.) If you have already marked text as a block, the options
are slightly different (as shown in the second key sequence),
because they are designed to allow you to designate which category
the marked text is to be in.
     For specific information on how Mark Text is used in
WordPerfect, see the specific topics.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Cross-Reference
     Document Compare
     Footnotes and Endnotes
     Indexes
     Lists
     Master Document
     Outlining
     Paragraph Numbering
     Tables
     Tables of Authorities
     Tables of Contents

A)Master Document(A

     Allows you to create a master document containing separate
documents (specified as subdocuments) that are to be printed
together.

B)Key Sequence--Inserting a Subdocument(B

     To insert a subdocument in the master document:

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Subdoc
           <name of file to be inserted> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Expanding the Master Document(B

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Generate
           Expand Master Document


B)Key Sequence--Condensing the Master Document(B

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Generate
           Condense Master Document
           Save Subdocs? No (Yes)

B)Usage--General(B

     The Master Document feature allows you to join any number of
separate WordPerfect files so that they are treated as one long
document for the purposes of printing and automated references.
     Each WordPerfect document tied to a master document is
considered a subdocument. A master document can be simply a series
of subdocument codes, indicating where the text of each
subdocument is to be inserted, or it can contain text of its own.
To insert a subdocument code, position the cursor in the master
document where the subdocument text is to occur (usually pressing
Ctrl-─┘ first to ensure that it begins on a separate page) and
follow the key sequence. When prompted to enter the subdocument
file name, type the name of the document. When you press ─┘,
WordPerfect displays the name of the subdocument, enclosed in a
single-line box, and enters a [Subdoc:] code into the master
document. To delete a subdocument from a master document, locate
this code in the Reveal Codes screen and delete it. The box
containing the subdocument's name in the document editing screen
will then disappear.

B)Usage--Expanding and Condensing Subdocuments(B

     To edit the text of a subdocument from within the master
document, expand the master document to include the text of all
subdocuments within it. Just follow the key sequence.
     When the master document is expanded, the [Subdoc:] code is
replaced by the text of the subdocument, enclosed in [Subdoc
Start:] and [Subdoc End:] codes. Once a master document is
expanded, you can edit any of its text, including that within the
[Subdoc Start:] and [Subdoc End:] codes.
     When you use the Exit (F7) or Save (F10) functions on an
expanded master document, you receive the prompt "Document is
expanded, Condense it? Yes (No)". Press ─┘ to condense it before
saving it. When you condense a master document, as indicated in
the key sequence, the text of the subdocuments is replaced with
the appropriate [Subdoc:] codes. Choose No to save it in expanded
form. If you press ─┘, you receive a second prompt "Save Subdocs?
Yes (No)". In version 5.1, you have three options: choose Yes to
have WordPerfect replace the subdocument with its revised version;
choose No to save the subdocument under a new file name; choose
Replace All Remaining to save all the revised subdocuments in the
master document without further prompts.
     Press ─┘ to save any editing changes in the subdocument
files before the master document is condensed. Choose N if you
don't want to update the subdocuments with the changes you have
made.
     You can also condense a master document at any time before
saving it. When you do, you receive the same prompt to save the
subdocuments as when you save the master document.
     During editing, be careful that you don't delete any of the
[Subdoc Start:] or [Subdoc End:] codes. If you do, WordPerfect
won't be able to replace the text that belongs to those codes with
the [Subdoc:] code. Therefore, the subdocument's text will remain
expanded in the master document. In such a case, delete the
subdocument text that can't be condensed and then reinsert the
file as a subdocument.
     You must expand the master document before you print it, or
the printout will contain the Subdocument codes instead of the
text stored in the subdocuments.
     You should also expand prior to generating tables of
contents, lists, and indexes. WordPerfect will automatically
expand the master document for you and display the prompt "Update
Subdocs? Yes (No)". Press ─┘ to save the subdocuments before
condensing the master document. Choose N if you don't want the
changes saved to them.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Append Block
     Cross-Reference
     Footnotes and Endnotes
     Indexes
     Lists
     Mark Text
     Merge Operations
     Tables of Contents

A)Math(A

     Performs calculations on numbers in your document.

B)Key Sequence--Turning Math On and Off(B

          Alt-F7 (Columns/Table) or Layout pull-down
           Math
           On; Off

B)Key Sequence--Defining Math Columns(B

          Alt-F7 (Columns/Table) then Math then Define
          or Layout pull-down then Math then Define
           <type of columns, negative number display, number of
          decimal places, and formulas to be used>
           F7 (Exit)

     Note: In version 5.0, the Columns/Table key is called the
Math/Columns key.

B)Usage--General(B

     You can use WordPerfect as a calculator for simple
mathematical functions such as addition, subtraction, multipli-
cation, and division. The program can calculate totals, subtotals,
and grand totals on numbers down columns. In addition, you can
write formulas that perform mathematical operations across columns
of numbers.
     You can use the Tables feature of version 5.1 much like a
spreadsheet (see Tables). You may want to use Tables instead of
the Math feature for some applications.

B)Usage--Turning Math On(B

     To get totals, subtotals, and grand totals from simple
columns of numbers (not predefined as Math columns):

       1. Clear and then reset the tabs (see Tabs). When Math mode
          is on, WordPerfect will align tabs on the
          decimal/alignment character, which is the period (.)
          unless you change it (see Decimal/Align Character).
       2. To turn Math on, press Alt-F7 (Columns/Tables), select
          the Math On option, and then select On. The Math prompt
          appears in the lower left corner of the screen.
       3. Press the Tab key to move to the first column, then
          enter the numbers you wish to work with. When you press
          the period (.) to indicate a decimal point, the numbers
          will align on that decimal point. When Math mode is on,
          WordPerfect treats the tab stop as a decimal tab, like
          the Tab Align key.
       4. Wherever you want a subtotal to be calculated in that
          column, insert a plus sign (+), either from the numeric
          keypad or from the top row of your keyboard. WordPerfect
          will subtotal each number in the column after the
          previous plus sign. Where you want a total of the sub-
          totals, enter an equal sign (=). If you want any numbers
          to be considered as subtotals or totals even if no
          calculation has been performed on them, enter t before
          any additional subtotals and T before any additional
          totals. To calculate a grand total--the total of all the
          totals--enter an asterisk (*).
       5. To tell WordPerfect to make the calculations you have
          specified, select Columns/Tables and then Calculate.
          (You can select this option at any time to have the
          program perform calculations--for example, as you enter
          the numbers.) WordPerfect displays double question marks
          (??) if it cannot make a calculation. If this occurs,
          recheck your Math Definition screen to make sure that
          the column references in any formulas you have written
          are correct.
       6. Turn Math mode off by selecting Math Off from the
          Columns/Tables menu.

     When Math mode is on, you can move between columns by using a
combination of the Ctrl key and the Right Arrow and Left Arrow
keys. Pressing Home Left Arrow after the Ctrl-Home (Go To)
sequence takes you to the beginning of the first text column.

B)Usage--Defining Math Columns(B

     If you want to perform calculations across columns of
numbers, you need to define math columns.
     For each column, you define three things: the type of column
(calculation, text, numeric, or total), the symbol to be used with
negative numbers (either parentheses or the minus sign), and the
number of decimal places that are to be displayed (0-4). To do
this, press Alt-F7 and select the Math and Define options to use
the Math Definition screen; or select Math from the Layout pull-
down menu then select Define. Each row under the letters A through
X corresponds to a column.
     All columns are predefined as numeric columns (type 2). To
change a column's definition, move the cursor to its letter by
using the arrow keys. Enter 0 if the column is to contain a
formula, enter 1 if the column is to contain only text, or enter 3
if the column is to contain a total calculated from other columns.
If you have defined the column as type 0, the cursor moves down to
the Calculation Formulas section of the screen to allow you to
enter the formula for the calculation. Only four columns can be
defined for calculations. Press F7 to exit to the menu and save
the definition. Press F1 to cancel.

B)Usage--Displaying Totals in Separate Columns(B

     If you have defined Math columns, you can display subtotals,
totals, and grand totals in separate columns. To do so, simply
define the column or columns that you wish to hold the total
calculations as total columns (type 3) and type the +, =, or *
symbol in your document in the column where you want the
calculation to appear.

B)Usage--Using Special Operators for Row Calculations(B

     To use certain special operators in computing the totals and
averages of rows, define the column that is to hold these special
operators as a calculation column (type 0). Then, when the cursor
moves to the Calculation Formulas area of the Math Definition
screen, enter any one of the special operators listed here.

       ■  The + symbol calculates the total of all the numbers in
          the row that are in numeric columns (type 2).
       ■  The +/ symbol calculates the average of all the numbers
          in the row that are in numeric columns (type 2).
       ■  The = symbol calculates the total of all the numbers in
          the row that are in total columns (type 3).
       ■  The =/ symbol calculates the average of all the numbers
          in the row that are in total columns (type 3).

     These special operators work on numbers to their right and
left, across the entire row--not just on numbers to the left.

B)Usage--Revising Math Definitions(B

     You will often want to change the definitions of math columns
so that you can add new columns of data, delete columns, or move
columns to new locations. With your cursor positioned before the
[Math On] code in the Reveal Codes screen, you can delete the old
[Math Def] code. Then press Alt-F7 (Columns/Tables), select Math,
and select the Define option to change any column definitions that
you wish. Recalculate by using the new definition before you move
to another part of your document.
     To revise a Math Definitions screen that you have already
defined, position the cursor to the right of the [MathDef] code
before you press Alt-F7 and select the Math and Define options.
You can then use the cursor-movement keys to position the cursor
on the settings you wish to change. To edit a formula, place the
cursor on the 0 that defines the column holding the formula and
reenter 0. The cursor will move to the Calculation Formulas
section of the screen, where you can edit the formula or delete it
by pressing F1 (Cancel).
     Remember that if you add, delete, or move columns, you will
also need to revise the formulas that involve them.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Decimal/Align Character
     Equations (Version 5.1)
     Tables
     Tabs

A)Merge Codes(A

     Indicates Merge codes available in version 5.1

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F9 (Merge Codes) or Tools pull-down then
          Merge Codes
           More

     Note: Merge codes have changed in version 5.1 of WordPerfect.
In version 5.0, you enter the merge codes ^C, ^D, ^E, ^F, ^G, ^N,
^O, ^P, ^Q, ^S, ^T, ^U, and ^V by pressing Shift-F9. Ends of
fields are indicated by pressing F9. Ends of records are indicated
by pressing Shift-F9 and inserting a ^E merge code.

     WordPerfect offers many optional Merge codes that you can use
to adapt the merge operation to special requirements. To insert a
Merge code in a document, choose More from the Merge menu. To
select a code, move the highlight cursor to it and press ─┘. You
can also type the first letter of a code's name to move directly
to it. In version 5.0, you press Shift-F9 (Merge Codes) and type
the letter of the code.
     Version 5.1 has changed the merge codes. In addition to the
{FIELD}name~ (called ^F in version 5.0), {END FIELD} (^R in 5.0),
and {END RECORD} (^E in 5.0), the following codes that have
version 5.0 equivalents can be used in WordPerfect 5.1:
     {CHAIN MACRO}macroname~--Replaces the version 5.0 ^G code;
instructs the program to execute a macro when the merge
terminates.
     {DATE}--Replaces the version 5.0 ^D code; inserts the current
date.
     {INPUT}message~--Replaces the version 5.0 ^Message ^O^C^O
code combination; allows you to present a user-created message
prompt or menu options on the screen. After the data is entered,
the user presses F9 to resume the merge.
     {KEYBOARD}--Replaces the version 5.0 ^C code; pauses the
merge and allows you to enter data for a field directly from the
keyboard.
     {MRG CMND}codes{MRG CMND}--Replaces the version 5.0 ^V code;
allows you to insert merge codes into the document currently being
created. This command is quite useful for setting up a complex
merge operation that adds records that you can transfer to an
existing secondary merge document. Thus, you can essentially
automate the procedure of adding records to any of your secondary
merge files.
     {NEST PRIMARY}filename~--Replaces the version 5.0 ^P code;
designates the primary file to be used so that you can switch to a
different primary file during a merge.
     {NEXT RECORD}--Replaces the version 5.0 ^N code that told the
program to go to the next record. Insert this code by choosing
Next Record from the Merge Codes menu.
     {PAGE OFF}--Replaces the version 5.0 ^N^P^P combination;
tells the program not to place a hard page break after each
primary file. Insert this code by choosing Page Off from the Merge
Codes menu.
     {PRINT}--Replaces the version 5.0 ^T code; sends text that
has been merged up to the location of that code to the printer.
     {PROMPT}message~--Replaces the version 5.0 ^O code; allows
you to present a message on the screen.
     {QUIT}--Replaces the version 5.0 ^Q code; terminates a merge
operation.
     {REWRITE}--Replaces the version 5.0 ^U code; rewrites the
screen, causing the merge document currently being generated to be
displayed on the screen.
     {SUBST SECONDARY}filename~--Replaces the version 5.0 ^S code;
allows you to specify a secondary file to be switched to during a
merge.
     In addition to these codes, version 5.1 allows you to use
many other sophisticated merge commands that control merge
operations. For example, you can chain primary and secondary files
so that when one merge finishes, another automatically begins, and
nest merge files so WordPerfect will switch to them during a
merge. In addition, special merge commands allow you to direct
WordPerfect to specific fields during a merge. These and other
merge commands are described in detail in your reference manual.
     You can use merge documents created in version 5.0 with
version 5.1, or you can update the codes to the new system by
selecting Ctrl-F9 then Convert old Merge Codes.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Date, Inserting the
     Merge Operations
     Merge Operations, Performing

A)Merge Operations(A

     Merges data stored in lists in a secondary document into the
appropriate places in a primary document.

B)Key Sequence--Designating a Field to Be Merged(B

     To designate a field from the secondary file to be merged in
the primary file:

          Shift-F9 (Merge Codes) or Tools pull-down then
          Merge Codes
           Field
           Field: <enter field number> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Inserting Other Merge Codes(B

          Shift-F9 (Merge Codes) or Tools pull-down then
          Merge Codes
           Field; End Record; Input; Page Off; Next Record;
          More

     Note: See Merge Codes for a list of codes that are different
in versions 5.0 and 5.1.

B)Key Sequence--Ending Fields in the Secondary File(B

          F9 (End Field)

B)Key Sequence--Ending Records in the Secondary File(B

          Shift-F9 (Merge Codes) or Tools pull-down then
          Merge Codes
           End Record

B)Usage--General(B

     Merge operations in WordPerfect can become quite complex, as
the program contains many sophisticated merge features. It is
beyond the scope of this reference to present a complete tutorial
in merge-printing with WordPerfect; instead, this guide briefly
summarizes the rules for working with merge operations.
     To perform a basic merge operation, such as a form letter,
you usually create and use two separate files: a secondary file
that contains all of the data to be substituted into each merged
document (such as names and addresses), and a primary file (such
as a letter) that indicates by special codes where each item from
the secondary file is to be placed. If you do not need to save the
variable data to use again, you can skip the process of creating
the secondary file and instead enter each variable item from the
keyboard as it is needed.
     When the program performs the merge, it takes each record
that you have specified from the secondary file and inserts its
contents into the appropriate place in the primary file, creating
a new merge file consisting of one filled-out standard document
for each record.
     For more information, see Merge Codes and Merge Operations,
Performing.

B)Usage--The Primary File(B

     Any primary file you use must indicate where the contents
(fields) of the records in the secondary merge file are to be
inserted. You do this by pressing Shift-F9, or choosing Merge
Codes from the Tools menu, then selecting Field. You then enter
the name or number of the field and press ─┘. In version 5.0, you
do this by pressing Shift-F9, typing F, entering the number of the
field (n), and pressing ─┘. In WordPerfect 5.1, the program
displays name ~ at that point in your document. The variable name
can be either a field name, such as customer address (note that
you can use spaces), or a number. (In version 5.0, you can only
use field numbers.) WordPerfect 5.1 displays the number of the
current field at the bottom of the screen so that you can keep
track of fields as you create your primary document. (See below
for a description of how to use field names in version 5.1.)
     Each time the program encounters a {FIELD}name~ in a primary
file (or a field number in WordPerfect 5.0), it inserts the
corresponding data from the nth (or name) field in the record that
is current in the secondary merge file. For example, if the code
were 1, WordPerfect would insert the contents of the first field
in the current record. WordPerfect numbers fields sequentially,
beginning with 1 for the first data item.
     If you are entering data from the keyboard instead of using a
secondary file, enter a ^C merge code at each point in the
document where you want to insert variable data. This instructs
WordPerfect to pause for input.

B)Usage--Creating a Primary File(B

     To create a primary merge file:

       1. Begin a new document, such as a letter. Enter all of the
          text that is not to vary from merge document to merge
          document.
       2. Indicate any places where you want information to be
          supplied from the secondary merge file by entering a
          name~ merge code. Do this by pressing Shift-F9 and
          choosing Field, or selecting Merge Codes from the Tools
          pull-down menu; enter a {KEYBOARD} merge code for input
          from the keyboard by choosing More and selecting
          {KEYBOARD}. In version 5.0, these codes are ^F and ^C,
          respectively. You cannot enter the correct codes by
          typing {KEYBOARD} or {FIELD}name~; you must enter them
          as described for your merge to take place successfully.

     WordPerfect 5.0 places the field number inside a pair of
carets (^) in the document. For instance, if you enter 2 after the
Field prompt, it will appear as ^F2^ in the text when you press
─┘. To delete a field from the primary file, you must delete the
entire field designation, including the carets.

B)Usage--The Secondary File(B

     The secondary merge file contains the data that will be
inserted into the final merged documents. To prepare a secondary
merge file, which is basically a database consisting of records
and fields, you must follow a certain set of rules so that the
program can accurately locate the data you want to use:

       ■  Each item of data (field) must start on a separate line.
       ■  Each line must be terminated by an {END FIELD} code (a
          ^R code in version 5.0), which indicates the end of a
          field. To insert this code, press F9.
       ■  Each record must end with an {END RECORD} code (a ^E
          code in version 5.0), which indicates the end of a
          record. To insert this code, use the Merge Codes command
          and type E. WordPerfect will insert the code and a hard
          page break into the document (see Page Break, Soft and
          Hard).
       ■  Each record must have the same number of fields,
          although some of them can be empty. This way,
          WordPerfect can always locate the correct data for, say,
          item 9, which would be in the ninth field. If records
          had variable numbers of fields, that data would not
          always be in the field with the same number.
       ■  A field can contain more than one line of data. For
          example, you can use a field to contain an entire
          standard paragraph or clause in a contract and simply
          insert it each time it is needed.
       ■  A field can contain several items of information, as
          long as you are willing to use those items as a unit.
          For example, a field may contain a complete name, such
          as "Rev. Evelyn Barker," but you will not be able to
          break that name into smaller units in your final
          documents.
       ■  In version 5.1, you can use field names instead of
          numbers. To do so, move to the beginning of the
          secondary document. Then choose More from the Merge
          Codes menu. From the menu that appears, choose {FIELD
          NAMES}name1...nameN. You will then be prompted to
          enter names for the field numbers you are using. For
          example, if the first field (field 1) holds the customer
          name, you may want to enter customer name at the "Field
          1:" prompt. When you have assigned all the field names
          that you need, press F7 (Exit) to return to your
          secondary file. You will then see a new {FIELD NAMES}
          record listing all of the named fields you have set up,
          as the first record in the document. After you have
          assigned field names, you can reference the fields in
          the secondary file by name in your primary file instead
          of by number.

B)Usage--Creating a Secondary File(B

     To create a secondary merge file:

       1. Begin each information item (field) on its own line and
          terminate it with a Merge R code. (In version 5.0, this
          is an ^R code.) If you do not have information for a
          particular field, press F9 to enter a Merge R code to
          mark its position in the record.
       2. Indicate where each record ends by entering a Merge E
          code on a separate line.

B)Usage--Merging Delimited Files(B

     You may often want to use WordPerfect's Merge feature with
secondary files such as a database of names and addresses that was
created in a database program. In database files used for mail-
merge operations, fields and records are arranged by using
delimiters, which are special characters that indicate the ends of
fields and records. Some programs use beginning and end
delimiters; some use only end delimiters. If you are setting up a
merge with one of these ASCII delimited files, you can tell
WordPerfect 5.1 what the delimiter characters are as you begin the
merge. When you are prompted for the name of the secondary file to
use, press Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out) and enter the name of that file.
You can then indicate which field and record delimiters the DOS
text delimited file uses. (If you use the same type of file often
for merges, you can use the Setup menu to indicate what the
delimiters are.) You will see that WordPerfect has set the default
end-field delimiter to be a comma and the default end-record
delimiter to be a carriage return. If these are not the characters
used by your database program, you can change them to the
characters used in the files you are working with. WordPerfect
will then place the {END FIELD} and {END RECORD} codes at the
proper locations when you merge the files.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Append Block
     Date, Inserting the
     Labels (Version 5.1)
     Master Document
     Merge Codes
     Merge Operations, Performing
     Page Break, Soft and Hard
     Sort and Select
     Text In/Out

A)Merge Operations, Performing(A

     Performs merge operations.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F9 (Merge/Sort) or Tools pull-down
           Merge
           Primary File: <name of primary file> ─┘
           Secondary File: <name of secondary file> ─┘

B)Usage--General(B

     For general information on merging, see Merge Operations. To
perform a merge operation, press Ctrl-F9 (Merge/Sort) and select
Merge, or choose Merge from the Tools menu. You are then prompted
to enter the names of the primary and secondary merge files to
use. As soon as you enter the name of the file containing the
secondary merge data you wish to use, WordPerfect begins the merge
operation.
     While the new file is being generated, you will see the
message "* Merging *" displayed in the lower left corner of the
screen. When the merge operation is completed, the cursor will be
at the end of the file. Scroll through the file to make sure the
correct data are in each field; then save the file.

B)Usage--Aborting a Merge(B

     You can abort a merge operation at any time before it is
finished by pressing F1 (Cancel). This causes WordPerfect to stop
merging and to write any letters or forms that have been completed
to the screen. (This is useful if you are using a large secondary
file and you do not need to print documents for all the records.)
To reexecute the merge operation, press F7 (Exit) and answer N to
the prompt about saving the new document. You can then edit either
the primary or secondary merge file and reissue the Merge command.

B)Usage--Merging to the Printer(B

     WordPerfect doesn't automatically save a newly created merge
file. When it completes a merge, it sends the merged file to the
screen and simply holds it in RAM. If you have a large number of
records in your secondary merge file, you may run out of RAM
before WordPerfect generates all of the merged copies. If this
occurs, the program stops the merge operation when no more memory
is available and processes only part of your secondary merge file.
     You can get around this limitation by using the technique
WordPerfect calls "merging to the printer". A special code,
{PRINT} (^T in WordPerfect 5.0), instructs the program to send
each document to the printer as it is completed and then clear its
contents from RAM.

     Note: When you merge to the printer, you may need to insert
additional codes that tell WordPerfect specifically which primary
and secondary file to use for each merge, which records to use,
and so forth (see Merge Codes).

A)Mouse (Version 5.1)(A

     Version 5.1 allows you to use a mouse to highlight text, move
the cursor, and select commands and functions without using the
keyboard.
     To use a mouse with WordPerfect 5.1, you must first install
it according to the documentation that came with your mouse. Then
use the Setup menu to tell the program what kind of mouse you are
using, which port it is attached to, and so forth.
     You can use a mouse to select features and commands as well
as using the keyboard, or you can use a combination of the two. To
display the pull-down menu, click the right mouse button. To
remove the pull-down menu display, click the right button again
(or press F7 or the spacebar).

     Note: If you are using the mouse as a left-handed mouse, keep
in mind that your mouse buttons are reversed.

     When a pull-down menu is displayed, you can move the mouse
pointer to an item and click the left mouse button to select it,
or you can press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the
pointer to an item, releasing the left mouse button to select it.
When a regular menu is displayed, you can click on an item to
select it or click with the right button to remove the menu from
the screen. The right mouse button works like the F7 (Exit) key,
but it will not exit you from WordPerfect.
     Keep in mind that the mouse pointer is not the same as the
cursor; the cursor indicates the current entry point in your
document. When you move the mouse pointer to a location on the
screen and click the left mouse button, you move the cursor to
that location.
     You can also click on prompts to select the highlighted
command that the prompt is displaying, such as Yes (No). To accept
the default response, double-click the left mouse button; it works
the same as pressing ─┘.
     When WordPerfect is displaying a list of items, such as when
you are in the List Files screen, the Select Printer screen, or
the Base Font screen, you can double-click on an item to select
it. In List Files, double-clicking lets you look at the contents
of a file or directory.
     To use the mouse with the Search function, select Search,
enter the pattern to search for, and press the right mouse button.
     If you need to see parts of your document that are not
visible on the screen, you can use the mouse to scroll to them.
Press the right mouse button and then drag the mouse to the edge
of the screen in the direction you want to scroll (right, left,
up, or down). To stop scrolling, release the mouse button. To
block text and scroll at the same time, use the left mouse button.
     To cancel a command or restore a deletion with a two-button
mouse, press either mouse button and hold it down. Click the other
button and release both. On a three-button mouse, the middle
button works like the F1 (Cancel) key. Most commands can be
canceled by pressing the right mouse button.

     Note: Do not use the mouse to position the cursor when you
are defining a macro; use the arrow keys instead.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Cursor Movement
     Pull-Down Menus
     Search

A)Move/Rename File(A

     Allows you to move a file to a new directory or rename it.

B)Key Sequence(B

          F5 (List Files) ─┘ or  File pull-down then
          List Files
           [highlight file to move or rename]
           Move/Rename
           <new path name to move and/or file to rename> ─┘

B)Usage(B

     The Move/Rename option on the List Files menu allows you to
rename files in the directory listing or to move them to a new
disk or directory on your hard disk. When you select this option
after highlighting the file to be moved or renamed (as indicated
in the key sequence), you receive the prompt "New name:" followed
by the current file name. To rename it, edit or retype the file
name. To move it to a new directory, edit the path name and leave
the file name as is. To move a file and rename it simultaneously,
edit both the path name and the file name. After making these
changes, press ─┘. If you renamed the document, the new name will
appear in the directory listing after you press ─┘. If you moved
the document, its name will no longer appear in the listing (you
must change directories to see it).
     You can use the Move/Rename option to relocate multiple files
in one operation. Mark all of the files to be moved with an
asterisk (*) by moving the cursor highlight to each one and typing
* (you can mark all of the files in the List Files listing at one
time by pressing Alt-F5). After marking the files to be moved,
select the Move/Rename option, enter the name of the
drive/directory that they are to be moved to, and press ─┘.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Append Block
     Copying Files
     Directories
     List Files

A)Name Search(A

     Moves the highlight cursor directly to the file or font name
whose initial characters match those you enter.

B)Key Sequence(B

     To locate a file or font from a list on a menu screen:

          N Name Search or F2 (Search)
           <character(s) to search for>
           ─┘ or arrow key to exit

B)Usage(B

     The Name Search feature positions the highlight cursor on the
first file or font whose name matches the character or characters
entered. It enables you to locate and select a particular file or
font in a long listing with just a few keystrokes.
     With version 5.0, you must press F2 (Search) to initiate a
Name Search on some screens. In version 5.1, you can use the Name
Search feature whenever a list is displayed, such as a list of
fonts, macro commands, or merge commands, by typing N. As you type
your first character, the highlight cursor jumps to a file or font
name that matches that character. As you continue to type
characters, the search narrows, moving the highlight to the first
file whose name begins with the matching characters. To exit from
a name search, press ─┘ or an arrow key.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Find
     List Files
     Search

A)Outlining(A

     Creates an outline by automatically numbering paragraphs as
you enter each level.

B)Key Sequence--Creating an Outline(B

          Shift-F5 (Date/Outline) or Tools pull-down
           Outline
           On (to turn on)
           ─┘ <text for level 1> ─┘
           Tab <text for next level> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Defining the Outlining Style(B

          Shift-F5 (Date/Outline) or Tools pull-down
           Define
           Starting Paragraph Number (in legal style);
          Paragraph; Outline; Legal (1.1.1); Bullets; User-
          Defined; Enter Inserts New Paragraph Number Y;
          Automatically Adjust to Current Level Y; Outline Style
          Name.
           F7 (Exit)

     Note: In version 5.0, the last three options under the Define
menu are omitted.

B)Key Sequence--Creating an Outline Style (Version 5.1)(B

          Shift-F5 (Date/Outline) or Tools
           Define
           Outline Style Name
           Create
           Name; Description; Type; Enter; Codes
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage--General(B

     After you have turned on Outline mode, each time you enter
characters or a space and then press ─┘, a new outline number is
generated in your text. To generate a number at a lower level,
press the Tab key after pressing ─┘. In version 5.1 you can
specify whether you want pressing ─┘ to generate a new outline
number (it is preset to do so) and whether that number should be
at a fixed level (see below).
     While you are in Outline mode, the prompt "Outline" appears
in the lower-left corner of your screen. In version 5.0, to turn
off Outline mode, press Shift-F5 (Date/Outline) and select the
Outline option again. In version 5.1, choose On or Off to turn
outlining on and off. Outline mode must be on (the Outline message
must be visible on the screen) in order for automatic outline
numbering to work.
     With the default settings in version 5.1, to indent text
without entering an outline number or letter when you are in
Outline mode, press the spacebar before you press the Tab key. You
can also use Indent (F4) or Indent (Shift-F4) to indent
text without inserting outline numbers.

B)Usage--Working with Outline Families(B

     Version 5.1 also allows you to work with associated entries
in an outline, which it calls an outline family. An outline family
includes the level of the line that contains the cursor as well as
subordinate outline entries. For example, if your cursor were on
the line containing item II in an outline and there were
subordinate entries below it (items A and B), those items plus all
of their subordinate entries (II.A.1, II.A.2, II.B.1, II.B.2, and
so forth) would be considered an outline family. You can move,
copy, and delete outline families, which allows you to restructure
and edit your outlines quickly. Moving, copying, and deleting
outline families works similarly to block moving and copying: when
the cursor is located on the line where you want to begin moving,
copying, or deleting that item plus all the successive related
items below it, press Shift-F5 (Date/Outline) or choose Outline
from the Tools menu; then choose one of the family options--Move
Family, Copy Family, or Delete Family. Once you have deleted a
family, you can restore it immediately at another location by
pressing Shift-F10 (Retrieve) and pressing ─┘.

B)Usage--Defining the Paragraph/Outline Numbering Style(B

     WordPerfect's default outlining style follows the system I.,
A., 1., a., (1), (a), i), a). You can use more than these eight
levels; the eighth-level definition is used for the levels after
the eighth, and each level is indented one additional tab stop.
Three other numbering styles are also built into the program:
paragraph style, which uses the system 1., a., i., (1), (a), (i),
(1), a); legal style, which numbers each paragraph and level
sequentially as 1, 1.1, 1.1.1, and so forth; and bullet style,
which uses a system of symbols that not all printers can produce.
You can also change the system of numbering and punctuation by
selecting the User-Defined option and specifying a custom style.
     Version 5.1 lets you specify whether it should automatically
adjust the outline to the current level. It is preset to Yes, but
if you want the program to always use a first-level number, such
as I., II., III., and so forth, change this setting to No. You can
also change whether pressing ─┘ inserts a new level or simply a
hard return when you are in Outline mode.

B)Usage--Creating Styles for Outlines(B

     In version 5.1, you can create styles for your outlines by
using the Outline Style Name option. It allows you to create a
style for each numbering level and to maintain a library of those
styles that you can choose from at any time. Creating an outline
style (see the step sequence above) is similar to creating a style
in the Style menu (Alt-F8): Choose Create; move the cursor to the
level you are creating a new style for; then enter the information
about it, such as its name and description, type (open or paired),
and so forth. If the style is a paired style, you can choose
whether pressing ─┘ turns it off or off and on again by using the
Enter option. At the Codes option, you can specify text and text
attributes, such as bold and italic, and sizes, such as Small or
Large, or specify a different font for your outline numbers. For
information about how to create and work with styles, see Styles.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Line Numbering
     Mark Text
     Paragraph Numbering
     Styles

A)Overstrike(A

     Prints two (or more) characters or fonts in the same
position.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Other
           Overstrike
           Create; Edit
           [enter or edit characters or fonts] ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     You can use the Overstrike feature to create composite
characters, such as foreign-language characters that use accent
marks or special math/science symbols. This is helpful if your
printer canot print characters in WordPerfect's Character sets
created with the Compose feature (see Compose). You can also use
Overstrike to have your printer combine attributes available from
the Font, Size, or Color menus that appear when you press Ctrl-F8
(Font).
     When you enter the characters and/or font attributes for
Overstrike (as shown in the key sequence), you see all of the
characters and attribute codes as you enter them. When you press
─┘ and F7 (Exit) to return to the editing screen, you see there
only the last character entered. WordPerfect prints all of the
characters and attributes included in the Overstrike definition in
the same position in the document.
     To edit a composite character created with Overstrike, bring
up the Reveal Codes screen with Alt-F3, position the cursor
immediately following the [Ovrstk:] code, and select the Edit
option as indicated in the key sequence. Enter the new characters
and/or attributes, press ─┘, and then press F7 (Exit) to return
to the editing screen. (See Codes.)
     To delete a composite character created with Overstrike,
locate and delete the appropriate [Ovrstk:] code in the Reveal
Codes screen.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Codes
     Compose
     Font

A)Page Break, Soft and Hard(A

     Divides pages automatically according to the top and bottom
margins, the size of the page, and the printer selected (soft page
break), or ends a page at the discretion of the user (hard page
break).

B)Key Sequence--Entering A Hard Page Break(B

          Ctrl-─┘ or Layout pull-down then Align then Hard Page

B)Usage--Soft Page Breaks(B

     WordPerfect automatically adjusts soft page breaks as you
edit your document. They are displayed as a line of dashes on the
screen. To change the placement of a soft page break, change the
top and bottom margins, or delete lines of text on the page.

B)Usage--Hard Page Breaks(B

     You can insert hard page breaks by pressing Ctrl-─┘ at the
point where you want a page break to occur or by selecting Layout,
Align, and Hard Page from the pull-down menus. For example, you
might want to end a short page at the end of one section of a
report so that the next main topic would begin a new page. Hard
page breaks are represented by a line of equal signs across the
screen.
     Hard page breaks are also used to indicate the end of a
column when you are using WordPerfect's Columns feature. (See
Columns.)
     To delete a hard page break, position the cursor next to the
line of equal signs that represents it and press Backspace or
Delete, or locate and delete the [HPg] code in the Reveal Codes
screen.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Protect
     Columns
     Conditional End of Page
     Footnotes and Endnotes
     Hard Return
     Labels (Version 5.1)
     Merge Operations
     Widow/Orphan Protection

A)Page Numbering(A3

     Adds page numbers that are automatically updated when you
make editing changes that affect pagination.

B)Key Sequence(B

     To turn on and off page numbering:

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Page
           Page Numbering
           New Page Number; Page Number Style; Insert Page
          Number; Page Number Position

     Note: In version 5.0, your options are different. To turn off
page numbering, choose No Page Numbers after selecting Page
Numbering. To specify a new starting page number, choose New Page
Number from the Page Format menu.

B)Usage--Using the Page Numbering Menu(B

     WordPerfect is preset for no page numbering, but you can turn
on page numbering at any point in your document by using the Page
Numbering option on the Page Format menu, as indicated in the key
sequence. When you select Page Numbering, you will see a menu with
four choices.
     You can begin numbering with a number other than 1 or change
the numbering system from Arabic (1, 2, 3) to upper- or lowercase
Roman (I, II, III; i, ii, iii) by using the New Page Number option
and typing in the new number.
     If you want page numbers to include text, choose Page Number
Style (Version 5.1) and enter the text as you want it to appear,
up to 30 characters. Include any size and appearance changes in
the font. Type (Ctrl-B) where you want the page number--for
example, Page ^B. WordPerfect will insert the Ctrl-B for you at
the last cursor position if you leave it out.
     To specify that the page number appear somewhere else in your
document, such as in a header or within text, move the cursor to
the location where you want the page number to appear and then
choose Insert Page Number (Version 5.1). If your page number style
is simply ^B (that is, if there is no text as part of the page
number style), you can simply press Ctrl-B where you want the page
number to appear (see below).
     When you choose Page Number Position, you will see a menu
that presents eight different choices for page number positions on
every page or on alternating pages. (If you are using version 5.0,
you will see this menu as soon as you choose the Page Numbering
option on the Page menu.) Press F to see a figure illustrating
this screen.
     Choose options 1-3 and 5-7 for page numbers to appear in the
same place on every page. Options 4 and 8 will insert page numbers
in different locations on alternating left and right pages. Option
9 turns off page numbering. If you are not specifying text to be
used with page numbers, choosing Page Number Position is all you
need to do to turn on Arabic page numbering.
     When you return to your document by pressing F7 (Exit), you
will not see page numbers on the screen, but they will appear when
the document is printed. You can use the View Document feature to
view page numbers in position on the screen (see View Document).

B)Usage--Inserting(B

     You can also use page numbering by inserting the code ^B in
your document. For example, if you want your headers or footers to
contain page numbers, enter a ^B (Ctrl-B) at the position where
you want the page number to occur. To specify the position of page
numbers in headers and footers, press Alt-F6 (Flush Right) or
Shift-F6 (Center) before you enter the ^B. If you are using both
the Page Numbering feature and the Headers or Footers feature, be
sure to insert an extra blank line at the beginning of the header
or at the end of the footer so that WordPerfect will have a line
on which to print the page number by itself; otherwise the page
number will overprint the last line of the header or footer.
     When you begin numbering with a new page number, you will see
the change reflected on the status line. Be sure to move the
cursor to the beginning of the page where you want numbering to
start when you use either the Page Numbering or New Page Number
option.
     To suppress page numbering on any given page, use the
Suppress option of the Page Format menu (see Suppress Page
Format). To turn off page numbering, use the No Page Numbers
option on the Page Number Position menu.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Cross-Reference
     Force Odd/Even Page
     Headers and Footers
     Suppress Page Format
     Tables of Authorities
     Tables of Contents
     View Document

A)Paper Size/Type(A

     Instructs WordPerfect to use a new page size or form
definition in printing.

B)Key Sequence--Specifying Paper Size/Type(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Page
           Paper Size/Type <highlight paper type>
           Select
           F7 (Exit)

B)Key Sequence--Setting Up a New Paper Size/Type(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Page
           Paper Size/Type
           Add
           <choose paper type> Paper Size; Paper Type; Font
          Type; Prompt to Load; Location; Double Sided Printing;
          Binding Edge; Labels; Text Adjustment
           F7 F7 F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect is preset to use 8½ x 11-inch paper, but you can
change to a different size and type of paper by using the Paper
Size/Type option on the Page Format menu. In version 5.1 this
feature is a streamlined version of the Forms feature of version
5.0; if you are using version 5.0, see Forms.
     When you choose the Paper Size/Type option, you will see a
list of the paper sizes and types that have been defined for the
printer that is currently selected. You can select one of these or
select Add to create a new paper size and type, or you can copy a
paper size and type that is close to what you want, and edit it.
     If you choose Add, you will be asked to choose a paper type
from a menu of several standard types, or choose Other and enter
the name of the form you are using. After you specify the paper
type, you can specify a size. In addition, you can choose Font
Type to specify whether the font is Landscape (printed sideways on
the page) or Portrait (printed in the normal orientation). Choose
Prompt to Load if you want WordPerfect to prompt you to load a
special paper into your printer when you print a document using
this paper size and type. The Location option allows you to
specify whether the paper will be sheet-fed from a bin, manually
fed, or continuous form. Choose Double Sided Printing if you are
printing on both sides of the paper. The Binding Edge option
allows you to specify whether the document should be printed so
that it can be bound at the top or on the left side. The Labels
option is used when you are printing mailing labels (see Labels).
The final option, Text Adjustment, allows you to adjust the
placement of the text on the page if your document is not printing
properly.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Binding Offset
     Forms (Version 5.0)
     Labels (Version 5.1)
     Margins, Left and Right
     Margins, Top and Bottom
     Printer, Edit

A)Paragraph Numbering(A

     Automatically numbers paragraphs as you enter them.

B)Key Sequence(B

     To number a paragraph:

          Shift-F5 (Date/Outline) or Tools pull-down
           Para Num
           Paragraph Level (Press Enter for Automatic): <level
          number, 1-8> or ─┘ or the right mouse button
           <text of paragraph> ─┘

B)Usage--General(B

     To number paragraphs automatically, press Shift-F5
(Date/Outline), or use the Tools pull-down menu, and select the
Paragraph Number option. You will be prompted to enter a paragraph
level number. You can simply press ─┘ or the right mouse button
for automatic paragraph numbering. When you press ─┘, WordPerfect
will insert a paragraph number. Each level of numbering is
associated with a tab stop. To enter progressively lower levels of
paragraph numbers, press the Tab key until you reach the level you
want. Then press Shift-F5, select the Paragraph Number option, and
press ─┘.
     You can also use fixed numbering, in which a particular
numbering style will be inserted no matter which tab stop you are
on. To use fixed numbering, enter the level (1-8) you want to
use when you are prompted for the paragraph level.

B)Usage--Defining the Style of Paragraph Numbering(B

     WordPerfect is preset to use the outline style of numbering
(I., A., 1., and so on). It also has a built-in paragraph
numbering style (1., a., i., and so on) and a legal numbering
style (1., 1.1., 1.1.1., and so on). To select the paragraph or
legal numbering style:

       1. Press Shift-F5 (Date/Outline) and select the Define
          option, or choose Define from the Tools menu.
       2. When the Paragraph Numbering Definition screen appears,
          select a numbering style from the options on the screen
          or create a style of your own by entering any
          combination of styles and symbols from the choices
          available. See Outlining for a discussion of the
          options.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Line Numbering
     Mark Text
     Outlining
     Styles

A)Print Color(A

     Allows you to select the color of the text (when printed), if
you have a color printer.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F8 (Font) or Font pull-down
           Print Color
           Black; White; Red; Green; Blue; Yellow; Magenta;
          Cyan; Orange; Gray; Brown; Other
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     If you have a color printer, you can use the Print Color
option on the Font menu to select different colors of text for the
printed page. For example, you might want to print cover sheets
for each section of a document or chapter of a book in a different
color, or you might want to highlight a specific section of text
by printing it in color.
     To return to black printing after having selected a different
color, select the Black option from the list of color options and
press Exit (F7).
     To specify a custom color, you can select the Other option
and enter an intensity percentage for red, green, and blue.

     Note: The Print Color option controls the color the document
is printed in, not the color of the characters on the screen.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Font

A)Print Job, Cancel(A

     Allows you to remove a print job from the print queue.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Control Printer
           Cancel Job(s)
           <job number> or * Y (to cancel all jobs)
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     Selecting the Cancel Job(s) option while the Control Printer
screen is displayed allows you to cancel a specific print job in
the print queue. When WordPerfect prompts you for the job to
cancel, enter the job number of the document that is being printed
or the job you want to cancel, and press ─┘. You may need to
press ─┘ again if your printer does not respond. If you are using
a large printer buffer, several seconds may elapse before your
printer stops printing what has already been sent to it. To cancel
all print jobs, enter an asterisk (*), answer Y to the prompt
"Cancel all print jobs?," and press ─┘.
     If you cancel all print jobs, you may get a message informing
you that you will need to initialize your printer before you can
continue printing. You may also need to adjust the paper in the
printer before you resume printing.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Printer Control
     Print Job
     Display
     Print Job
     Rush
     Printing, Stop

A)Print Job, Display(A

     Allows you to see the remaining print jobs in the queue
beyond those displayed on the Control Printer screen.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Control Printer
           Display Job(s)
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     Each time you send a document to the printer, WordPerfect
assigns it a job number. The first three print jobs are listed on
the Control Printer screen; an Additional Jobs Not Shown message
indicates that there are additional print jobs that are not listed
on the Control Printer screen. You can use the Display Jobs option
to see all of the current print jobs, if there are more than
three.
     Viewing the print job numbers is useful if you are selecting
a print job to cancel or bring to the head of the print queue.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Print Job, Cancel
     Print Job, Rush

A)Print Job, Rush(A

     Allows you to select a print job to be sent to the top of the
queue.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Control Printer
           Rush Job
           <job number>
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     To move a print job to the head of the queue, select the Rush
Job option from the Control Printer screen. WordPerfect will
prompt you for the number of the job to rush. Enter the job number
and press ─┘. If you answer Y to the Interrupt prompt,
WordPerfect will immediately print your rush job and then resume
printing the job it was working on. If you answer N, it will print
the rush job as soon as the current job is finished.
     If the job you want to rush is a new print job that you
haven't yet sent to the printer, first send it to the printer in
the normal way; then select the Rush Job option and enter the job
number for that job.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Print Job, Cancel
     Print Job, Display

A)Print Multiple Pages(A

     Allows you to print selected pages from the document on the
screen (Version 5.1).

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Multiple Pages
           <enter page range> ─┘

B)Mouse(B

     WordPerfect 5.1 allows you to print selected pages from the
document that is on the screen, even if it has not been saved.
When you use this option, enter the page pattern as x-y to print
pages x through y; x, y or x y to print pages x and y; x- to print
page x to the end of the document; and -y to print from the top of
the document to page y. (See Printing Current Document for
additional examples of page patterns.)
     If you need several copies of a particular group of pages,
choose Number of Copies (option N) and enter the number of copies
of the selected pages you want.
     Normally, WordPerfect will generate the extra copies, but you
can save time when you are using downloadable fonts or printing
graphics if you specify that your printer will handle multiple
copies.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Print Options
     Printing Current Document

A)Print Options(A

     Allows you to specify the settings to be used for binding,
print quality, multiple copies, and so forth.

B)Key Sequence(B

     To change print options for the current document:

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Select Printer; Binding Offset; Number of Copies;
          Multiple Copies Generated by; Graphics Quality; Text
          Quality
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     To change print options for the document you are working
with, press Print screen (Shift-F7). The options in the lower half
of the screen are the printing options that you can change for
each print job. Version 5.1 has added the Multiple Copies
Generated by option, which allows you to specify whether
WordPerfect or your printer will generate multiple copies.
     Many laser printers can print several copies of specified
pages. Normally, WordPerfect will generate the extra copies, but
if you are using downloadable fonts or printing graphics, you may
find it faster to specify that your printer generate the multiple
copies by choosing the Multiple Copies Generated By option and
selecting Printer instead of WordPerfect. If you are using
WordPerfect on a network, your network may also have this
capability.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Binding Offset
     Print Multiple Pages
     Print Quality
     Printing Current Document
     Redline/Strikeout

A)Print Quality(A

     Allows you to specify the print quality to be used for text
and graphics as well as to print graphics separate from the text
in your document.

B)Key Sequence--Changing Graphics Quality(B

     To change the graphics print quality or to print text only:

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Graphics Quality
           Do Not Print; Draft; Medium; High

B)Key Sequence--Changing Text Quality(B

     To change the text print quality or to print graphics only:

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Text Quality
           Do Not Print; Draft; Medium; High

B)Usage(B

     The Graphics Quality and Text Quality options on the Print
menu control the quality of document printing (draft, medium, and
high) for the text and graphic images in your document. You can
use these options to prepare rough drafts of documents and to
print graphics (which take longer to print) separately from
document text. You can select a different print quality for both
text and graphics. WordPerfect prints color graphics in black and
white, using shading for the color areas.
     If your printer can print both text and graphics, but not at
the same time, you can use the Do Not Print option after selecting
the Graphics Quality option to print just the text. Then reinsert
the paper in the printer and print just the graphics by selecting
the Do Not Print option after choosing the Text Quality option.
     Print Quality settings apply to every print job until you
change them again or quit WordPerfect.

     Note: If your graphics do not print completely on a laser
printer, you may need additional memory. Graphic images take up a
large amount of memory.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Graphics
     Print Options

A)Printer Command(A

     Inserts special printer formatting commands that are sent to
the printer when your document is printed.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Other
           Printer Functions
           Printer Command
           Command; Filename
           <printer command codes or filename> ─┘
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     You can use the Other option on the Format menu (Shift-F8) or
the Layout pull-down menu to display the Printer Functions menu
and insert special printer codes that turn on special effects your
printer can produce. However, WordPerfect can provide most common
printer features directly.
     To use special printing effects that WordPerfect does not
support directly, you must insert a code that WordPerfect sends to
your printer to tell it what to do. These codes are specific to
each printer, so you must consult your printer manual for a list
of the codes used.
     To issue a printer command, enter the ASCII code for the
printing effect you want. You cannot enter ASCII codes less than
32 or greater than 126 directly from the keyboard, but instead
must enter their decimal equivalents, enclosed in angle brackets.
ASCII codes are case-sensitive: Uppercase A (ASCII code 065) is
not the same as lowercase a (ASCII code 097), for example.
     You will not see printer commands on the screen, but they
will be sent to the printer when you print your document.

B)Example(B

     To enter the sequence Esc # for your printer, you do not
enter the letters "esc" or press the Esc key. Instead, you enter
the decimal ASCII equivalent of Esc, 27, enclosed in angle
brackets and followed by the # symbol. To do this, you select the
Command option as indicated in the key sequence and then enter
<27># after the Cmnd: prompt. The format code entered for this
printer command (visible only when you use Reveal Codes) will
appear as [Cmnd:<27>#].

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Type Through

A)Printer Control(A4

     Allows you to examine and make modifications to the jobs in
the print queue, as well as to start and stop printing.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Control Printer
           Cancel Job(s); Rush Job; Display Jobs; Go (start
          printer); Stop

B)Usage(B

     To control the printing process as it is going on, select the
Control Printer option from the Print menu. Doing this brings you
to the Control Printer screen, where you may cancel specific print
jobs, start a rush print job, display print jobs, restart the
printer after it has been stopped, or stop the printer without
canceling print jobs. Press F to see a figure illustrating this
screen.
     After you have temporarily stopped the printer, you can start
it again by using the Go option on this menu.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Print Job, Cancel
     Print Job, Display
     Print Job, Rush
     Printing Current Document
     Printing from List Files
     Printing, Stop

A)Printer, Edit(A

     Allows you to edit a printer definition.

B)Key Sequence(B

To edit a printer definition:

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File then Print
           Select Printer
           [highlight the name of the printer]
           Select
           F7
           Edit
           Name; Port; Sheet Feeder; Cartridges and Fonts;
          Initial Base Font; Path for Downloadable Fonts and
          Printer Command Files
           F7 (Exit) three times

     Note: The Forms option in version 5.0 is no longer on the
Edit Printer menu. In version 5.1, these settings are on the Paper
Size/Type option of the Page Format menu (see Paper Size/Type). If
you are using version 5.0, this option indicates the location of
the paper sizes and types you intend to use with the printer (see
Forms).

B)Usage--Establishing a Printer Definition(B

     After you have selected a new printer (see Printer, Select),
you will see the Printer Helps and Hints screen, which contains
information about the specific printer you are installing. Press
F7 (Exit) to go to the next menu, where you can change the
printer's name, specify which port it is connected to, select a
sheet feeder, select forms, specify cartridges and fonts, set the
default font that the printer is to use, and specify a path for
downloadable fonts and printer command files.
     The Name option allows you to change the name that appears on
the Select Printer: Edit menu. You can enter up to 36 characters
for a new name.
     The Port option is used to indicate the port your printer is
connected to. The default setting is LPT1, the first parallel
printer port. If the printer whose definition you just chose is
connected to another parallel port, select Port. You will see a
menu listing LPT ports 1 through 3 and COM ports 1 through 4. If
your printer is connected to a different port, select the Other
option and specify the device name.
     When defining a printer that uses a serial port, you will see
a screen indicating the baud rate, parity, number of stop bits,
character length, and type of hardware handshaking (XON/XOFF) that
your printer normally uses. If you are using different settings,
select them and change them. See your printer manual to determine
valid settings for your printer.
     Use the Sheet Feeder option if you are using a sheet feeder
to feed paper into your printer. Select the sheet feeder that you
are using; then choose the Select option. A Helps and Hints screen
will appear after you have selected the sheet feeder, and the
sheet feeder definition will be copied into the .PRS file that is
being created for your printer definition.
     The Cartridges and Fonts option indicates the fonts and
cartridges you plan to use with the printer (see Cartridges and
Fonts). The Initial Base Font option indicates the current default
font to be used with that printer. The font selected as the
initial font will be used each time you start a new document. To
override it, you can use the Initial Font option on the Document
Format menu or change it through the Base Font option (see Base
Font). The last option is used to indicate the path name for the
subdirectory in which you are storing downloadable fonts or
printer command files (see Cartridges and Fonts and Printer
Command).

B)Usage--Editing Printer Definitions(B

     The Edit and Copy options of the Print: Select Printer menu
allow you to copy and then modify an existing printer definition.
For example, you might want to set up the same physical printer
with two different definitions under different names. The first
definition might specify a different default font or sheet feeder
from the second definition, and you could quickly choose either
"printer" by selecting its name from the list of installed
printers.
     You can also use the Select Printer option to delete a
printer from the list of installed printers by choosing the Delete
option. To get additional help about the specific printers you
have installed, use the Help option. To get help with a sheet
feeder, press Shift-F3 (Switch) when you are viewing the Printer
Help screen.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Base Font
     Cartridges and Fonts
     Forms (Version 5.0)
     Paper Size/Type
     Printer Command
     Printer, Install
     Printer, Select
     Printing to Disk

A)Printer, Install(A

     Allows you to install a new printer.

B)Key Sequence(B

     To install a new printer:

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Select Printer
           Additional Printers
           Select; Other Disk; Help; List Printer Files; Name
          Search
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage--Installing a New Printer(B

     If the printer you want to use is not displayed when you
choose the Select Printer option, use the Additional Printers
option to install it. If the program cannot find the additional
printer files, use the Other Disk option to direct it to the drive
or directory containing the additional printer files. The printer
drivers are on Printer disks 1 through 4. The program will display
a list of the printer drivers on each disk. When you see the
printer you want to install, move the cursor to highlight its
name, then press ─┘. The Name Search option allows you to search
for a specific printer's name. When you select a printer,
WordPerfect will display the printer definition file (with the
.PRS extension) used by this printer. Press ─┘ again to have the
program copy this file (see Printer, Edit).

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Printer, Edit
     Printer, Select

A)Printer, Select(A

     Allows you to select a new printer.

B)Key Sequence(B

     To select a new printer:

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Select Printer
           [highlight the name of the printer]
           Select
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage--General(B

     WordPerfect saves the printer selection you have made for
each document with that document. In version 5.1, you can use the
Initial Settings submenu of the Setup menu to specify that
retrieved documents be formatted for the printer that is currently
selected.
     To select a printer for the document, press Shift-F7 (Print)
and choose the Select Printer option. The program will display a
list of printers that you have installed, and an asterisk (*) will
appear next to the name of the currently selected printer. You can
move the highlighting to the printer you want to use and press ─┘
to select it, or select an option from the following menu:

          1 Select; 2 Additional Printers; 3 Edit; 4 Copy; 5
          Delete; 6 Help; 7 Update:1

     Version 5.1 has added the last option, Update, to make
updating your printer driver quicker. From time to time,
WordPerfect issues new printer drivers with its interim releases.
(To see the date of your release, press F3 from the editing screen
and check the upper-right corner.) If you get a new release of
WordPerfect, you may want to update your printer driver. To use
this option, first delete the old .ALL files from your directory;
then copy the new .ALL files from your new WordPerfect disk into
your directory. You can then choose this option to update your
printer driver.

B)Usage--Viewing Installed Printers(B

     As you are selecting new printers, you may want to review the
list of printers you have already installed (see Printer,
Install). The List Printer Files option on the Additional Printers
submenu allows you to view a list of the installed printers.
WordPerfect keeps information about printer drivers in files with
an .ALL extension. Once a printer file is created, its definition
is kept in a file with a .PRS extension, which is what you see
listed on this screen.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Printer, Edit
     Printer, Install
     Printing Current Document
     Printing a Document on Disk

A)Printing the Current Document(A5

     Prints the current page, a range of pages, or the entire
document on your editing screen.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File then Print
           Full Document; Page; Multiple Pages <page range>

     Note: In version 5.0, the Multiple Pages option is omitted.

B)Usage--General(B

     WordPerfect allows you to print documents in a variety of
ways (see the following table). You can print the document that is
currently in RAM (displayed on the screen) or you can print a
saved document through the Control Printer screen. In addition,
you can print through the List Files screen (F5), or you can print
a block of text that you have marked with Block (Alt-F4).

WordPerfect's Printing Methods:
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     TO PRINT                      KEY SEQUENCE
     A saved document from the     Shift-F7 <file name> ─┘ ─┘
     Control Printer screen

     A range of pages              (for document on screen) Shift-
                                   F7 Multiple Pages <page numbers
                                   to print separated by commas,
                                   range of page numbers to print
                                   separated by dashes> ─┘ or
                                   Shift-F7 <file name> <enter
                                   page range> (for document on
                                   disk)

     A document on the List        F5 ─┘ {highlight document}
     Files screen                  Print

     A group of documents on       F5 ─┘ {highlight each
     the List Files screen         document} * (to mark it) 4 Y

     The entire document on        Shift-F7 Full Document
     the screen

     The page on the screen        Shift-F7 Page

     The text on the screen        Shift-PrtSc

     A block of text               Alt-F4 {highlight block}
                                   Shift-F7 Y

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     When you select Print, the Print menu appears. (You can also
press Ctrl-PrtSc to bring up this menu.) Press F to see a figure
illustrating this screen.
     To print the text of the entire document on the screen,
select the Full Document option. To print the current page, select
the Page option. To print selected pages (in version 5.1), select
Multiple Pages and enter the range of pages you want to print. To
enter the page range, you type the starting and ending page
numbers, separated by a dash, over the (All) that appears after
the Page(s) prompt. To print from a specific page to the end of
the document, enter the starting page number followed by a dash.
To print from the beginning of the document up to and including a
specific page, enter a dash followed by the ending page number.
When entering any of these combinations, be sure not to enter any
spaces between the numbers and the dash or commas used.
     The following table shows the various combinations that you
can enter at the Page(s) prompt and the results of each.

Entering Pages to be Printed:
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     ENTRY                    RESULT
     Page(s): 4               Prints only page 4 of the document.
     Page(s): 6,12            Prints pages 6 and 12 of the
                              document.
     Page(s): 2-6,17          Prints pages 2 through 6 and page 17
                              of the document.
     Page(s): 10-             Prints from page 10 to the end of
                              the document.
     Page(s): -5              Prints from the beginning of the
                              document through page 5.
     Page(s): x-xii           Prints Roman numeral pages 10
                              through 12.
     Page(s): iv,2-5,iv-x     Prints the first Roman numeral page
                              iv, Arabic numeral pages 2 through
                              5, and finally the second Roman
                              numeral pages iv through x.

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

B)Usage--Other Print Options(B

     In version 5.0, if your printer supports type-through
printing, you can also use the Print menu's Type Through feature
to print as though your keyboard were a typewriter, either one
character or one line at a time. In version 5.1, the Type Through
option is no longer supported. (See Type Through (Version 5.0).)
     The View Document option lets you preview your document by
pages to see how it will appear when printed. Headers, footers,
notes, graphics, and page numbers will be displayed on the
previewed pages. (See View Document.)
     The Initialize Printer option is used when you download soft
fonts. When you choose this option, the fonts you have marked as
present when the print job begins (using *) with the Cartridges
and Fonts option are downloaded to the printer you have selected.

B)Usage--Changing Print Options(B

     Before you print a document, you can temporarily modify the
print options that control the printer used, the number of copies
printed, the binding width, and the quality of text and graphics.
To do this, select one of the options from the lower half of the
Print menu:

          S - Select Printer
          B - Binding Offset (Binding Width)
          N - Number of Copies
          U - Multiple Copies Generated by
          G - Graphics Quality
          T - Text Quality

     Note: The Select Printer and Binding options are discussed
separately (see Binding Offset, Printer Select), and the Graphics
Quality and Text Quality options are discussed under Print
Quality. The Multiple Copies Generated by option (Version 5.1) is
discussed under Print Options.
     Use the Number of Copies option to specify the number of
copies of a document to be printed while you work on other
documents or begin a new one.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Binding Offset
     Cartridges and Fonts
     Fonts
     Printer Control
     Printer, Select
     Printing a Document on Disk
     Printing from List Files
     Print Multiple Pages
     Print Options
     View Document

A)Printing from Disk(A

     Prints a document that has been saved on disk.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File then Print
           Document on Disk
           Document name: <file name> ─┘
           Page(s): ─┘ (to print all) or <range or selected
          page numbers> ─┘

B)Usage(B

     To print a document that has been saved on disk, select the
Document on Disk option from the Print menu, and enter the file
name of the saved document. Press ─┘ to print the whole document,
or enter the pages you want to print. In version 5.1, you can
choose to print only the document summary by typing S instead of
pressing ─┘, or you can type S, a comma, and selected page
numbers to print a range of pages.
     In version 5.0, you cannot print a document on disk that you
have saved with the Fast Save option unless you move the cursor to
the end of the document before you save it, or retrieve it to the
screen and print it with the Full Document option. Version 5.1
will automatically run the cursor through a document that has been
"fast-saved" so that you can print it from disk, but this process
takes some time. You can turn off the Fast Save option by using
the Setup menu. It is preset to off in version 5.0 and to on in
version 5.1. (See Fast Save.)
     If the document you are printing from disk was formatted for
another printer, you will be asked if you want to print the
document anyway (Version 5.1). If you choose Yes, remember that
formatting specific to the original printer may look different on
the current printer.
     If you did not select a printer when you installed
WordPerfect, you will need to do so when you print a document for
the first time. WordPerfect saves the printer selection you have
made for each document with that document. (In version 5.1, you
can specify that retrieved documents be formatted for the printer
that is currently selected.)
     To select a printer for a document, press Shift-F7 and choose
the Select Printer option (see Printer, Select). When you select a
different printer for a document, it is reformatted for that
printer. To print a document formatted for a printer other than
the one that is attached to your computer, select the printer you
want the document to be formatted for. Then print it from disk
(using the Document on Disk option on the Print menu or the Print
option on the List Files screen) without retrieving it to the
screen. This technique lets you get a hard copy of a document
formatted for a printer that is not available--for example, if you
are working at home with a dot-matrix printer but will print a
final draft of your document on a laser printer at work.
     If the document you are retrieving has been formatted for a
printer that you have not installed (for example, if you are
exchanging files with other WordPerfect users), you will see a
message indicating that WordPerfect cannot find that particular
printer (.PRS) file. It will format the document for your default
printer in that case.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Fast Save
     Printer, Select
     Printing Current Document
     Printing to Disk

A)Printing from List Files(A

     Prints a document on disk from the List Files menu.

B)Key Sequence(B

          F5 (List Files) ─┘
          or File pull-down then List Files ─┘
           [highlight name of file to be printed]
           Print
           Page(s): ─┘ (to print all) or <range or selected
          page numbers> ─┘

B)Usage(B

     To print a document listed on the List Files screen, move the
cursor highlight to the document's name and select the Print
option on the List Files menu.
     To have WordPerfect consecutively print (batch-print) a group
of documents listed on this screen, you must mark each document to
be printed by highlighting it and then typing an asterisk (*) to
mark it. After you have marked all of the document files you wish
to print, select the Print option. When you respond Y to the
prompt to print the marked files, WordPerfect begins printing the
documents in the order in which they were marked. The program
places all marked files in its print queue in the order they were
marked.
     If you need to use printer control at any time, you can press
Shift-F7 and go to the Control Printer screen (see Printer
Control).
     To print documents in other subdirectories, highlight the
directory name and press ─┘ twice; then highlight the document
file you want to print and select the Print option. Again, if you
want to print a group of files listed in this subdirectory, mark
all of the files with an asterisk. To return to the current
directory, highlight .. <Parent> <Dir> and press ─┘.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Directories
     List Files
     Printer Control
     Printing Current Document

A)Printing, Stop(A

     Halts the current printing job.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Control Printer
           Stop
           [fix printing problem]
           Go (start printer)
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     You may need to stop the printer temporarily to insert a new
ribbon or clear a paper jam. To do so, choose the Stop option from
the Control Printer screen. This interrupts printing but does not
cancel the job. After you have stopped the printer, select the Go
option to start it again. If printing does not resume as soon as
you select Go, check the message area of the Control Printer
screen. You may need to reposition the paper in the printer, for
example.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Print Job
     Cancel

A)Printing to Disk(A

     Saves a copy of the document on disk in DOS text or ASCII
format.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           Select Printer
           [highlight printer name]
           Edit
           Port
           Other
           Device or file name: <name of text file> ─┘
           F7 (Exit) twice
           Full Document

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect can output a document file to a new disk file
rather than to your printer; this is known as printing to a disk.
The new disk file created with this operation is essentially a DOS
text (ASCII) file that also contains all of the printing control
codes required to print it as it was formatted by WordPerfect. To
save a file as a DOS text file without the formatting codes, use
the Text In/Out key (Ctrl-F5).
     When you follow the key sequence, you can print the DOS text
file from DOS without having a copy of WordPerfect running. This
allows you to print WordPerfect documents on a printer attached to
another computer that does not even have WordPerfect on it.
     As indicated in the key sequence, you need to select the
printer name that represents the type of printer that will be used
to print the file. Remember that the correct printer definition
may differ from the one you use to print documents on the printer
(or printers) attached to your computer. (See Printer, Edit.)
     After you specify the printer port, you will need to select
the Other option and then type a file name under which the DOS
text file version of your document will be stored (see Short/Long
Document Names). If you do not specify a new path name,
WordPerfect will save the document in the default directory. When
naming the file, you can use the same file name and add the
extension .TXT to differentiate it from the original document
file.
     If you select the DOS Text printer definition, WordPerfect
automatically saves the file under the name DOS.TXT.
     To obtain a hard copy of the DOS text file, you can use the
DOS COPY or PRINT command. (Use COPY if you have temporarily
exited from WordPerfect to DOS.)

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Printer, Edit
     Short/Long Document Names (Version 5.1)
     Text In/Out
     Printing a Document on Disk

A)Pull-Down Menus(A

     Allows you to select WordPerfect commands and features from
menus that appear at the top of the screen instead of using the
function keys.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Alt-= or [click right mouse button]

B)Usage(B

     With version 5.1, in addition to the standard function key
interface, WordPerfect has a system of pull-down menus that appear
when you press the Alt key or the right mouse button.
     When you are using pull-down menus, you can use both the
keyboard and the mouse in any combination. To select an item from
a menu, you can click on it with the left mouse button; you can
type the highlighted mnemonic letter of its name; or you can type
the number that corresponds to the position of the item in the
menu. You can also press ─┘ when an item is highlighted to select
it.
     If selecting an item brings up another pull-down menu, you
will see a right-pointing arrowhead at the end of that item. To
display the pull-down menu associated with that item, drag the
mouse to the item and then release the mouse button or click on
the item with the left mouse button. (See Mouse for instructions
about using the mouse). If an item in a pull-down menu is in
brackets, it cannot be selected; for example, you cannot copy or
move text until you have marked a block of text.
     In pull-down menus, Home Left Arrow and Home Right Arrow move
the highlight to the ends of the main menu bar; Home Up Arrow and
Home Down Arrow (or PgUp and PgDn) move the highlight to the top
and bottom of the menus.
     Because the items on the pull-down main menu bar are
different from the names of the function keys, you will note that
in this book an alternate selection is given at the beginning of
each step sequence for pull-down menu users. The choices on the
main pull-down menu bar are:

          File Edit Search Layout Mark Tools Font Graphics Help

Once you have chosen from the pull-down menus, you will be in the
regular WordPerfect screens. For example, to use the Line Format
menu, you select Line from the Layout menu instead of pressing
Shift-F8 and typing 1 or L. After you select Line, you will see
the regular Line Format menu.
     To exit from the pull-down menus without selecting anything,
press F1 (Cancel), Esc, or the Space bar, or click anywhere with
the right mouse button. To exit all the way out of submenus to the
editing screen, press F7 (Exit).
     You can use pull-down menus when you are recording a macro;
the keystrokes will be recorded just as if you were using the
keyboard. However, do not use the mouse to position the cursor
when you are recording a macro.
     You can use the Setup menu to change how the pull-down menus
are displayed on your screen to select whether the Alt key
displays the pull-down menus, and to specify that the mouse
pointer will automatically go to the menu bar whenever a menu
appears (see Mouse).

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Macros
     Mouse
     Mouse (Version 5.1)

A)Redline/Strikeout(A

     Allows you to mark text that has been added to the document
with redlining and text that has been deleted from it with
strikeout.

B)Key Sequence--Redlining/Striking Out Text As You Type(B

          Ctrl-F8 (Font) or Font pull-down
           Appearance
           Redln; Stkout
           <text> Right Arrow

B)Key Sequence--Redlining/Striking Out Existing Text(B

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight text]
           Ctrl-F8 (Font) or Font pull-down
           Appearance
           Redln; Stkout

B)Key Sequence--Selecting a New Redlining Method(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Document
           Redline Method
           Printer Dependent; Left; Alternating
           F7 (Exit)

B)Key Sequence--Removing Redlining and Strikeouts(B

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Generate
           Remove Redline Markings and Strikeout Text from
          Document <Delete redline markings and strikeout text?>
          No (Yes)
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage--General(B

     Redlining and strikeout are useful features for marking
sections of text that have been altered so that others can review
the changes quickly without having to check the entire document.
     To mark text for redlining (most printers do this by placing
a vertical bar in the left margin), select the Redline option.
When you have finished typing the text you wish to highlight,
press the Right Arrow key to move beyond the second [redln] format
code, or select Font and then Normal to turn off redlining.
     To redline text you have already typed, mark the text as a
block before you turn on redlining (see Block Operations). The way
WordPerfect represents redlining on the screen varies according to
the type of monitor you are using, and it may not appear the same
way in the printed document.
     To strike out existing text, mark the text as a block and
then select the Strikeout option.

B)Usage--Changing the Redlining Method(B

     You can choose Printer Dependent, Left, or Alternating as the
method of redlining. If you choose Printer Dependent, redlining
will appear as your printer has defined it; you can test-print a
redlined paragraph to see how this appears. The Left option marks
redlined text with a horizontal bar in the left margin. The
Alternating option marks redlined text on even pages in the left
margin and redlined text on odd pages in the right margin.

B)Usage--Deleting Strikeouts and Redlining(B

     Before you issue the final version of a document, you will
probably want to delete text that has been struck out and remove
redlining marks. To do so, press Alt-F5 (Mark Text), choose the
Generate option, and choose the Remove Redline Markings and
Strikeout Text from Document option. When you type Y in response
to the prompt, all text between the [STKOUT] and [stkout] codes
will be deleted, and the Redline and Strikeout codes will be
removed from the document.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Document Compare
     Font
     Mark Text
     Print Options

A)Retrieve(A

     Retrieves a document on disk or the last text that was cut or
copied.

B)Key Sequence--Retrieving a Document at the Editing Screen(B

          Shift-F10 (Retrieve) or File pull-down then Retrieve
           Document to be retrieved: <document name> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Retrieving Moved Text(B

     To retrieve the text most recently moved in the current
document:

          Shift-F10 (Retrieve) or File pull-down then Retrieve
           Document to be retrieved: ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Retrieving a Document from List Files(B

          F5 (List Files) ─┘
          or File pull-down then List Files ─┘
           [highlight name of file to be retrieved]
           Retrieve

B)Usage(B

     To retrieve a saved document, select Retrieve and enter the
name of the document; then press ─┘. You can also press F5 (List
Files) at the "Document to be Retrieved:" prompt to see the
contents of a directory (see List Files).
     If you do not enter a document name but instead press ─┘ at
the prompt, the last text you moved or copied from a document you
have been working on in the current session will be inserted at
the cursor position. You can paste a selection several times by
using this feature.
     You can also retrieve documents from the List Files menu by
selecting its Retrieve option. If you retrieve a document while
you are working on another document, you will see the prompt

          Retrieve into current document? Yes (No)

If you select Yes, the retrieved document will be inserted at the
current cursor position, added to the current document.
     Normally, WordPerfect retrieves a document as it was
formatted for the printer that was selected when it was saved.
     If you try to retrieve a locked document, you will be
prompted for a password (see Locking a File).
     To retrieve a DOS text file, use Text In/Out (Ctrl-F5).

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Append Block
     Text In/Out
     List Files
     Locking a File

A)Rewrite, Screen(A

     Turns off and on automatic screen rewriting.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F3 (Screen)
           Rewrite

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect normally rewrites the screen as you enter and
edit text so that what you see on the screen resembles what you
get in your printed documents. You can temporarily turn off
automatic screen formatting to speed up the program's operation if
you are working with graphics or complex screen displays.
     When you have turned automatic formatting off, you can
rewrite the screen by simply pressing Screen (Ctrl-F3) twice.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Graphics
     View Document

A)Save(A

     Saves a document on disk under the name you assign to it.

B)Key Sequence--Saving a Document(B

          F10 (Save) or File pull-down then Save
           Document to be saved: <file name> ─┘

B)Usage(B

     To save a file you are working on and then return to it,
press Save (F10). WordPerfect will prompt you for a file name if
you have not saved the file before. Enter a name of up to eight
characters with an optional three-character extension (include a
directory and drive designation if you want to save the file
somewhere other than the current drive and/or directory); then
press ─┘.
     If you have saved the file previously, WordPerfect will
provide its file name when you press Save. To save the file under
the same name, press ─┘ and respond Y to the prompt

          Replace <file name>? No (Yes)

to indicate that you do want to replace the original version of
the file with the edited version you are now saving. The default
setting is No, which allows you to leave the existing file intact
and save the new version under another name. If you want to rename
the file in order to keep two versions of a document, press ─┘ to
accept the No setting. WordPerfect will allow you to enter a new
file name. Enter the new name (including a drive and directory
designation, if you do not want to use the current ones) or edit
the existing name; then press ─┘.
     If you are using long document names (see Short/Long Document
Names), you will be prompted for a long document name as well as a
document type when you save the document. You can enter up to 68
characters, including spaces, for the name and up to 20 characters
for the type. If the document has been previously saved, you can
save it under the same name by pressing ─┘ and choosing Y when
you are prompted to confirm the replacement. WordPerfect will then
show you its version of the DOS file name, abbreviated to eight
characters (the type will be indicated by a three-character
extension). If you have previously saved the document without
using a long document name, that version of its name will be shown
as the DOS file name.
     You can save a document as DOS text (ASCII format), in
generic word processing format (all codes removed except tabs), or
in WordPerfect 4.2 format (or 5.0 format if you are using version
5.1) by using the Text In/Out menu (Ctrl-F5, or select Text Out
from the File menu).
     WordPerfect 5.1 is preset to use the Fast Save option on the
Setup menu, which means that it saves a document without
formatting it first. This can save you time as you save documents,
but it can slow down printing time (see Fast Save).
     To cancel a save sequence, use the Cancel key (F1).

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Exit
     Printing a Document on Disk
     Fast Save
     Short/Long Document Names (Version 5.1)
     Text In/Out

A)Search(A

     Locates the next occurrence in the document of specified text
or formatting codes.

B)Key Sequence--Searching Forward(B

          F2 (Search) or Search pull-down then Forward
           -> Srch: <search text or function keys>
           F2 (Search)

B)Key Sequence--Searching Backward(B

          Shift-F2 (Search) or F2 Up Arrow or Search
          pull-down then Backward
           <- Srch: <search text or function keys>
           F2 (Search)

B)Usage(B

     When you select Forward Search, the prompt "-> Srch:" appears
at the bottom of your screen. The rightward direction of the arrow
indicates that WordPerfect will search for your string of
characters from the cursor's present position to the end of the
document. After you have entered the search string, press F2 or
Esc to carry out the search.
     To start a search by using the mouse, select Forward,
Backward, Next, or Previous from the Search menu. Enter the search
string; then press the right mouse button. The Next and Previous
options will search for the next occurrence of the last search
string below the cursor (Next) and above it (Previous).
     You can include up to 59 characters in the search string.
WordPerfect ignores case (capitalization) differences in a search
as long as the search string is entered in all lowercase letters.
To make a search case-sensitive, enter it using the appropriate
capital letters. If you enter characters in uppercase, WordPerfect
will search for those characters only as capital letters.
     If WordPerfect does not find a match for your search string,
it will display the message "* Not Found *", and the cursor will
not move from its original position. In such a case, you can press
F2 again and retype or edit the search string.
     After WordPerfect finds the first occurrence of your search
string, you must repeat the Search command to locate any
subsequent occurrences. To reissue the command without changing
the search string, press F2 twice. To edit the search string
before performing the search again, press F2 once, make your
changes, and then press F2 again.
     For example, if you enter file list, WordPerfect will find
all occurrences of File List, file list, file List, and File list.
If you do not enter a space before "file" and after "list,"
WordPerfect will also return any occurrences of the two words
together within other words, such as "refile listings." To have
WordPerfect search for an entire word by itself, enter a space
before and after it.
     If you enter FILE LIST, WordPerfect will search for FILE LIST
in uppercase letters only.

B)Usage--Canceling a Search Operation(B

     To abort a search operation after entering the search string,
press F1 (Cancel). To return to the place in your document where
you were before you began a search operation, press Ctrl-Home (Go
To) twice.

B)Usage--Using Wild Cards in a Search(B

     You can substitute Ctrl-X for any character when searching
for words or phrases in your documents. For example, a search for
noCtrl-X returns now, not, nor, non, and so forth. It also returns
words that contain now, not, nor, non, and so forth, such as
nowadays, notable, nonapplicable, enormous, denoted, and
anonymous. To enter the wild card (Ctrl-X), press Ctrl-V first.
Also note that you cannot use Ctrl-X at the beginning of a search
string. Using Ctrl-X as a wild card is useful if you do not
remember the exact spelling of the word you wish to find. If you
want to limit WordPerfect's search to complete words, you must
enter spaces before and after the search string. However, note
that this method will not locate words that have a punctuation
mark immediately following them.

B)Usage--Extended Searches(B

     When WordPerfect performs a standard search operation, it
does not look for matches to your search string in any headers,
footers, footnotes, endnotes, graphics box captions, or text boxes
that you have added to the document. However, you can perform an
extended search operation to include these elements. To do this,
press Home before you press F2 to perform a forward search.
     With pull-down menus, choose Extended from the Search menu.

B)Usage--Searching in Reverse(B

     You can instruct WordPerfect to search backward through your
document to the beginning by pressing Shift-F2 instead of F2 (or
by pressing Up Arrow when the Search prompt is displayed). When
you press Shift-F2, WordPerfect responds with the prompt "<-
Srch:".
     The leftward direction of the arrow shows you that
WordPerfect will search from the cursor's present position toward
the beginning of the document. After you enter your search string,
press Search (F2) to initiate the reverse search, or click the
right mouse button. To perform the reverse search operation to
locate a previous occurrence, press Shift-F2. To change directions
and perform a forward search using the same search string, press
the Down Arrow key when the Search prompt is displayed. You can
always change the direction of a search by pressing Down Arrow or
Up Arrow when you see this prompt.
     You can also have WordPerfect perform an extended reverse
search by pressing Home before you press Shift-F2 and enter your
search string.

B)Usage--Searching for Format Codes(B

     You can also use WordPerfect's Search feature to locate a
particular formatting code. (This feature also works while you are
using Reveal Codes; see Codes.) To indicate the code to be
searched for, press the appropriate function key or key
combination (including, if applicable, the number of the menu
option) instead of typing an alphanumeric search string in
response to the Search prompt. For instance, to perform a forward
search to find the first occurrence of a hard page break, press F2
and then press Ctrl- ─┘. In response, the program will display
the format code as the search string "-> Srch: [HPg]". When the
code is located, the cursor will be positioned immediately after
it.
     You can also use this technique to find format codes that
require the use of menu options (see Codes). For example, to
search for a [Col On] code, press F2, then press Alt-F7
(Math/Columns) and type C.
     If you press twice the key that generates a paired code, the
Search function will locate the second formatting code of a pair,
such as the [undrln] in [UNDRLN][undrln] or the [bold] in
[BOLD][bold], so that, for example, you can replace an underlined
word or phrase with a boldfaced version of that same word or
phrase. If you perform a regular search for one of these paired
codes, WordPerfect locates the first (uppercase) code. However, if
you press the key for the code twice, the program will locate the
second (lowercase) code, which allows you to locate the beginning
of a bold word or phrase, mark it as a block, locate its end, and
change it to another style or attribute, such as underline or
italics.
     For example, to search for an [undrln] code, you press F2 and
then press Underline (F8) twice. Press Left Arrow twice; then
press Del to remove the [UNDRLN] code. (If you do not delete the
first code, the program will locate only codes with no text
between them.)

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Codes
     Document Comments
     Document Compare
     Find
     Mouse (Version 5.1)
     Name Search
     Search and Replace

A)Search and Replace(A

     Locates the next occurrence of specified text or formatting
codes and replaces them with new text or codes.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Alt-F2 (Replace) or Search pull-down then
          Replace
           w/Confirm? No (Yes)
           Srch: <search text or codes> F2 (Search)
           Replace with: <replacement text or codes> F2
          (Search)

B)Usage(B

     You can search for words or phrases and replace them with
substitute words or phrases that you specify. You can search for
up to 59 characters and replace them with as many as 59
characters, including spaces. You can search and replace backward
by pressing Up Arrow before entering the search string.
     To perform a search-and-replace operation, select Replace
(Alt-F2) or choose Replace from the Search pull-down menu. For an
extended replacement that includes headers, footers, endnotes,
footnotes, graphics box captions, and text boxes, press Home
before you press Alt-F2. WordPerfect then asks whether you want to
confirm each replacement. If you enter Y, WordPerfect will ask you
to confirm whether you want to make the replacement each time it
finds the word or phrase you specified (the search string). If you
press ─┘ to accept the No default selection, WordPerfect will
replace each occurrence of the search string without prompting
you.
     You are then prompted to enter the search string. Press F2
after you enter it. WordPerfect will prompt you to enter the
replacement string. You can enter text as well as the following
formatting codes (see Codes) if you want them to be inserted in
your document:

     Appearance; Center; Center Page; Columns On/Off; Font; Hard
     Space; Hyphen; Hyphenation Cancel; Indent; Justification
     On/Off; Left-Right Indent; Margin Release; Math On/Off; Math
     Operators; Merge Code; Size; Soft Hyphen; Tab; Tab Align;
     Widow/Orphan On/Off

     If you do not enter a replacement, WordPerfect will delete
all occurrences of the phrase or codes you are searching for.
     After you have entered the replacement string, press F2 or
click the right mouse button to begin the search-and-replace
operation.
     Press Cancel (F1) to end a search-and-replace operation.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Codes
     Find
     Macros
     Printer Command
     Search

A)Short/Long Document Names (Version 5.1)(A

     Allows you to view documents with longer, descriptive names.

B)Key Sequence--Viewing Long Names(B

     To view long names of documents:

          F5 (List Files) or File pull-down then List Files ─┘
           Short/Long Display
           Short Display; Long Display

B)Key Sequence--Setting Long Display(B

     To set long display as the default and specify a default
document type:

          Shift-F1 (Setup) or File pull-down then Setup
           Environment
           Document Management/Summary
           Long Document Names Yes; Default Document Type
           F7

B)Usage(B

     In versions of WordPerfect prior to 5.1, you were restricted
to the DOS naming conventions (eight characters plus an optional
three-character extension) when naming files and directories. In
WordPerfect 5.1, you can give a document a more descriptive name
when you save or exit; this will be displayed when you have the
Long Display option on in the List Files screen.
     To have WordPerfect prompt you to assign long document names,
set the Long Document Names option to Yes in the Setup menu by
using the key sequence outlined above. From then on, you will be
prompted for a long document name as well as a document type (see
below) when you save a document or exit. You can use up to 68
characters, including spaces, for the document name and up to 20
characters for the type. After you enter the name and type (or
press ─┘ to accept what the prompt is showing), WordPerfect will
show you the abbreviated DOS file name for the document; you can
edit it if you like. If you have previously assigned the document
a name using the normal DOS conventions (eight characters plus an
optional three-character extension), this name will be shown at
the prompt.
     The Default Document Type is also a new feature in
WordPerfect 5.1. It allows you to group related documents
together--such as memos, letters, or chapters of different books--
by assigning them a type. The document type appears as a three-
character extension of the DOS file name, but it is displayed in
its entirety when you are viewing long document names in List
Files. You can use the Setup menu to specify a Default Document
Type; WordPerfect will then suggest the document type when you
save the document using long document names.
     To retrieve a document by using its long document name, you
must use the List Files screen. You cannot enter a long document
name when the "Document to be retrieved:" prompt appears (by
pressing Shift-F10 in the editing screen or choosing Retrieve from
the File menu).
     To view long document names you have assigned if the List
Files screen is not showing the long display, select the
Short/Long Display option and choose Long Display. With Long
Display on, WordPerfect must read part of each file in a
directory, which can slow down the program, especially in a large
directory.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Directories
     Document Summary
     Exit
     List Files
     Printing to Disk
     Save

A)Sort and Select(A

     Allows you to select and sort lines of text, paragraphs, or
secondary merge file records.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F9 (Merge/Sort) or Tools
           Sort
           Input file to sort: ─┘ (for screen) or <file name>
          ─┘
           Output file for sort: ─┘ (for screen) or <file
          name> ─┘
           Perform Action; View; Keys; Select; Action; Order;
          Type

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect's Sort feature allows you to perform three kinds
of sorting. Each kind calls for its own special formatting:

       ■  For a line sort, data is organized into columns and
          rows, as in a spreadsheet. Each row forms a record, and
          each column is separated by a tab.
       ■  For a paragraph sort, the data to be sorted is separated
          by two (or more) hard returns or a hard page break
          (Ctrl-─┘).
       ■  For a merge sort, the data is in a secondary merge file.
          Each field is terminated by a Merge R code (^B), and
          each record in the file is terminated by a Merge E code
          (^E).

     To sort a file by any of these three methods, select Ctrl-F9
(Merge/Sort), or use the Tools pull-down menu, and then select the
Sort option. You will then be prompted for the name of the input
file to sort. If you press ─┘ to accept the default selection
(Screen), WordPerfect will sort the file that's in RAM (on your
screen). To sort a file that's on disk, enter the complete file
name and press ─┘.
     You are then prompted to indicate where you want the sorted
data output. WordPerfect will suggest (Screen) as the output
destination. If you wish to save the data in a disk file, enter
the file name.
     You can also mark a block of text and sort the items in it
(see Block Operations).

B)Usage--Selecting the Type of Sort(B

     Once you have specified the input and output files, you are
presented with the Sort by Line screen. Sort by Line is the
default sort type. To perform a different kind of sort, select the
Type option unless your cursor is in a table (in version 5.1).
When you do, you are presented with these options:

          Sorting Type: 1 Merge; 2 Line; 3 Paragraph: 0

To select Merge Sort, enter 1 or M. To select Paragraph Sort,
enter 3 or P.
     In WordPerfect 5.1, you can sort cells in a table (see
Tables). If the cursor is in a table when you select Sort, you
will see the Table Sort screen. It provides the same features as
the other sort screens (defining sort order, defining sort keys,
and so forth; see below), but allows you to sort by cell.

B)Usage--Defining the Sort Order(B

     The default sorting order used by WordPerfect is ascending.
To change the sort order, select the Order option from the Sort
menu. When you do, you are presented with these options:

          Sorting Order: 1 Ascending; 2 Descending: 0

B)Usage--Defining the Sort Keys(B

     To sort data in a file, you must designate the key(s), on
which to sort it. WordPerfect lets you define up to nine keys for
any one sorting operation.
     To define the sort key(s) to be used, select the Keys option
from the Sort menu. You must then define the type of data that
will be sorted (alphanumeric or numeric), indicate the field
and/or word to be used as the key (fields and words are numbered
beginning with 1 from left to right, with words separated by
spaces), and specify the line number to be used (for a paragraph
or merge sort).
     When you have defined the type of sort, the sort order, and
the sort keys to be used, select Perform Action to sort your data.
As soon as WordPerfect has sorted your data, the Sort window will
disappear, and you will be returned to the full-screen document
window.

B)Usage--Selecting the Records to Be Sorted(B

     WordPerfect also allows you to set up conditions that select
only certain records. To use the Select feature, you must first
define the sort keys that you wish to use. Then choose the Select
option from the Sort menu. Enter the condition that must be met,
followed by the number of the key to which the condition is
applied. When entering the condition, you type the appropriate
logical operator after the key number, followed by a value. For
example,

          Key1<=650.00*Key1>=2500.00

specifies those records in which Key1 (an amount-due field) is
between $650.00 and $2500.00. The asterisk (*) denotes the logical
AND operator. The following table shows the symbols and logical
operators used in sorting records.

Symbols and Logical Operators Used in Sorting Records:
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     SYMBOL    FUNCTION                    EXAMPLE
     =         Equal to                    key1=IL
     <>        Not equal to                key1<>CA
     >         Greater than                key1>M
     <         Less than                   key2<50.00
     >=        Greater than or equal to    key1>=74500
     <=        Less than or equal to       key2<=H
     *         Logical AND                 key1=IL * key2<60600
     +         Logical OR                  key1=IL + key3>1000.00
     g         Global selection            keyg=Mary

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     After you enter your selection condition, press Exit (F7) to
return to the Sort menu. Select Perform Action to have WordPerfect
select and sort your records.
     WordPerfect also lets you select records without sorting
them. To do this, you still must define the necessary keys and
enter the selection condition as previously described. However,
before you select Perform Action, select the Action option. When
you do this, WordPerfect presents these options:

          Action: 1 Select and Sort; 2 Select Only: 0

Choose the Select Only option. When you choose the Perform Action
option, WordPerfect will eliminate all records that do not meet
the selection condition, although their arrangement will be
unchanged from the order in which they were originally entered.

B)Usage--Changing the Sorting Sequence (Version 5.0)(B

     To change the sorting sequence, press Ctrl-F9 and select Sort
Order. You are then presented with these options:

          Sort Order: 1 US/European; 2 Scandinavian: 0

To select the Scandinavian sorting sequence, which contains more
than 26 letters, press 2 or S. To return to the US/European
sorting sequence (the normal dictionary sort order for languages
using the Roman alphabet without any foreign-language characters),
press 1 or U.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Merge Operations
     Tables

A)Speller--General(A

     Allows you to check the spelling of a word, a block of text,
or an entire document.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F2 (Spell) or Tools pull-down then Spell
           Word; Page; Document; New Sup. Dictionary; Look Up;
          Count

B)Usage--General(B

     WordPerfect's Speller key (Ctrl-F2, or Spell on the Tools
menu) allows you to check your documents for typographical errors
and misspellings. In version 5.1, the Speller also checks for
certain types of incorrect capitalization. Its main dictionary
contains over 100,000 words, and it automatically creates a
supplemental dictionary that contains all the words you add to the
dictionary as you write.
     If you are using the Speller on a floppy disk system, you
must first insert the Speller disk into drive B.

     Note: In version 5.1, you must have high-density floppy
drives (720K or higher).

     You can choose whether to check the word the cursor is on,
the current page, or the entire document. You can also check the
spelling in text you have marked with Block (Alt-F4).

B)Usage--Using the Speller(B

     When you use the Speller, WordPerfect checks your document
for words it does not recognize. When it encounters one of these,
it presents the message "Not Found" and displays a list of
possible spellings (if it finds any near matches). You can simply
press the letter corresponding to the correct word; WordPerfect
inserts it into the document for you.
     The Speller ignores numbers, but it will query alphanumeric
words, such as F3.
     WordPerfect's Speller also locates words that occur twice in
a row and presents the following menu:

          Double word: 1 2 Skip; 3 Delete 2nd; 4 Edit; 5 Disable
          Double Word Checking

You can choose Delete 2nd to delete the second occurrence, or you
can leave the words in place (choose Skip). The Disable Double
Word Checking option allows you to turn this feature off so that
the program does not query you at double words.

B)Usage--Checking a Word(B

     To check the spelling of the word the cursor is on, select
Spell (press Ctrl-F2 or use the Tools pull-down menu) and select
Word. If the cursor moves to the next word, the current word is
spelled correctly. If the spelling is incorrect, WordPerfect will
present a list of any possible alternatives. Press the letter
corresponding to the word you wish to use or, if the correct
alternative is not displayed, press Right Arrow to begin editing
the word manually.

B)Usage--Checking a Page(B

     To check for misspellings and typographical errors only on
the page on which the cursor appears, use the Page option. You may
want to do this if you have checked the entire document and then
made corrections or additions to a certain page. (See Speller--
Page and Document Options.)

B)Usage--Checking a Document(B

     The Document option allows you to check your entire document,
including headers, footers, footnotes, and endnotes. (See
Speller--Page and Document Options.)

B)Usage--Changing Dictionaries(B

     By selecting the New Sup. Dictionary option, you can specify
that WordPerfect check a custom dictionary that you have created.
To create a new supplemental dictionary, simply create a new
document containing the words you want to include, each separated
by a hard return. Make sure that the words are spelled correctly.
When you save the document, you should give it a name, such as
LEGAL.SUP, that helps you remember it is a supplemental
dictionary. Then enter that name when you are prompted for the
name of a supplemental dictionary after selecting this option.
     To create custom main dictionaries, use the Speller Utility,
a separate program that is available on the Speller/Thesaurus
disk.
     You can specify the directory in which your dictionaries are
stored by using the Location of Files option on the Setup menu.

B)Usage--Looking Up an Alternative Spelling(B

     To look up alternative spellings of a word, select the Look
Up option and type a word or word pattern at the prompt.
WordPerfect then presents all the close combinations of that
pattern it can find in its dictionaries.
     When you look up a word, you can use the question mark (?)
and asterisk (*) wild-card characters in place of letters you are
unsure of. The question mark stands for any one letter, and the
asterisk represents a sequence of letters. For example, type
rec??ve to see whether receive is spelled as "receive" or
"recieve."

B)Usage--Getting a Word Count(B

     To obtain a quick count of the number of words in a document,
use the Count option of the Spell menu. This option works without
spell-checking the document. A count is also given after each
spell check.

B)Usage--Checking Capitalization (Version 5.1)(B

     Version 5.1's Speller will also query you if it comes across
a word whose first two letters are capitalized, such as YOu, or a
word whose first letter is lowercase and second letter is
capitalized, such as yOu. Choose Replace to have the second
capitalized letter changed to lowercase, or choose Disable to
disable case checking.

B)Usage--Exiting from the Speller(B

     To exit from the Speller, press Cancel (F1). The program will
present a count of the text it has checked up to that point. Save
your document if you want the changes introduced with the Speller
to be incorporated into the saved version.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Hyphenation
     Language
     Speller--Page and Document Options
     Thesaurus

A)Speller--Page and Document Options(A

     Allows you to check the spelling of a page or an entire
document.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F2 (Spell) or Tools pull-down then Spell
           Page or Document
           Skip Once; Skip; Add Word; Edit; Loop Up; Ignore
          Numbers

B)Usage--General(B

     Once you've selected the Page or Document option of the Spell
menu, the standard menu you see when a word is being queried
contains five options:

          1 Skip Once; 2 Skip; 3 Add Word; 4 Edit; 5 Look Up; 6
          Ignore Numbers

To use any other features of the Speller, see Speller--General.

B)Usage--Skipping a Word(B

     If you select Skip Once, the Speller will query you the next
time it locates the pattern in your document. Use Skip if you want
to keep a certain spelling in this document but do not want to add
it to the dictionary. You will not be queried on that spelling
again during the current session with the Speller.

B)Usage--Adding a Word(B

     To add a word that is being queried--such as a proper name
or a specialized term--to the dictionary as you are correcting a
document, select Add Word. WordPerfect will then add it to the
supplemental dictionary that is automatically created as you use
the Speller.
     You can also add words to the supplemental dictionary
directly by retrieving the file WP{WP}EN.SUP and typing each word
that you wish to add, separated by a hard return. Be sure to save
the file under the same name after you have added words to it.
(While you have the file on the screen, you can also correct any
misspelled words that may have been inadvertently added to the
supplemental dictionary.)

B)Usage--Editing a Word(B

     If you choose Edit, you can edit the word that is presented
or simply use the Right Arrow or Left Arrow key to move from that
word to the part of the sentence or paragraph that you wish to
edit. While you are working with the Speller, only the Right Arrow
and Left Arrow keys, along with Backspace and Delete, are
available as cursor-movement keys. You cannot use most of the
other cursor-movement techniques, such as Go To (Ctrl-Home) or
End. You can change from Insert to Typeover mode, however. After
you have edited a word in your document, press Exit (F7) to return
to the Speller.

B)Usage--Looking Up a Word(B

     By selecting the Look Up option while you are checking a
document, you can enter a word that you wish WordPerfect to look
up. Type a word or word pattern at the prompt. WordPerfect then
presents all of the close matches to the word that it can find in
its dictionaries.

B)Usage--Ignoring Numbers(B

     WordPerfect's Speller will stop and query alphanumeric
combinations such as F1. If you want it to ignore words that
contain numbers, select Ignore Numbers the first time it queries
such a combination. (Use the Add option to add alphanumeric words
you use frequently to the dictionary.)

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Hyphenation
     Speller--General
     Thesaurus

A)Spreadsheet (Version 5.1)(A

     Allows you to import data from spreadsheet files.

B)Key Sequence--Importing Data from a Spreadsheet(B

     To import data from a spreadsheet (one time only):

          Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out) or File pull-down then Text In
           Spreadsheet
           Import
           Filename <enter name and press ─┘ or press F5 to
          see list>
           Range <enter range of cells to import>
           Type
           Table, Text
           Perform Import

B)Key Sequence--Linking a Spreadsheet to the Current Document(B

          Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out) or File pull-down then Text In
           Spreadsheet
           Create Link
           Filename <enter name and press ─┘ or press F5 to
          see list>
           Range
           Type
           Table or Text
           Perform Link

B)Key Sequence--Specifying Link Options after Creating a Link(B

          Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out) or File pull-down then Text In
           Spreadsheet
           Link Options
           Update on Retrieve No then F7 (Exit); Show Link
          Codes Yes then F7 (Exit); Update All Links

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect 5.1 allows you to import spreadsheet data from
Lotus 1-2-3 (pre-3.0 versions) and PlanPerfect, WordPerfect
Corporation's spreadsheet program. You can import an entire
spreadsheet or a range of cells. In addition, you can create a
link to a spreadsheet in your document as you update it in the
spreadsheet program.
     When you are importing spreadsheets, you can press F5 and ─┘
to see the List Files screen for the current directory, or you can
edit the path name to view another directory, where you store the
spreadsheet files. You can also use wild card characters to
specify that you view only spreadsheet files. For example, editing
the path name from C:\WP51\*.* to C:\WP51\*.WK1 will display only
the Lotus 1-2-3 files that are in the WP51 directory in the List
Files screen. Likewise, you can press F5 when you are specifying a
range of cells to import to see any rnges you have defined in your
spreadsheet. To enter an unnamed range, enter the cell address of
the upper left corner of the block of cells you want to import,
type a colon (:), and enter the cell address of the lower right
corner of the block of cells--for example, A1:D10.
     You can choose whether you want the data imported as a table
or as text. No matter which you choose, you will be able to edit
the data once it is in WordPerfect. If you import it as a table,
it can be edited like a WordPerfect table (see Tables). If you
import it as text, the spreadsheet cells are separated by tabs and
rows are separated by hard returns.
     If the spreadsheet extends beyond the right margin of the
page size you are using, you will get a warning message. If you
have imported the spreadsheet as a table, the cells that will not
fit in the page are not displayed; if you have imported it as
text, the cells are wrapped to the next line at the right margin.
If this happens, you can print the page in Landscape mode
(lengthwise on the page), change the right and left margin
settings, or edit the data to break it into smaller tables.
     You can also import a spreadsheet into a graphics box (see
Graphics) as long as it will fit on one page.

B)Linking a Spreadsheet(B

     If you link a spreadsheet, changes that are made to it while
it is in the spreadsheet program will be reflected in the linked
data in your document. WordPerfect will automaticaly retrieve the
linked data when you select Perform Link.
     Before you link a spreadsheet to a document, you can specify
certain link options, as outlined in the step sequence above. The
program is preset not to update a linked spreadsheet each time you
retrieve the document; to have WordPerfect automatically update
the linked spreadsheet when you retrieve the document, set this
option to Yes. To update the links while you are working in
WordPerfect, select the Update All Links option. When you do so,
any changes that were made and saved in the linked spreadsheet
after you retrieved the document will be updated.
     WordPerfect normally displays nonprinting Link: and Link End:
codes at the points where a link begins and ends. You can set the
Show Link Codes option to No to suppress this display.
     Although linked data can be edited in WordPerfect, you should
not edit it until you are sure it is final form and will not need
to be updated again. When you update a linked spreadsheet, you
will lose any editing changes that you made to it previously. The
linked spreadsheet data will be in the base font that is in effect
in the document; you may, for example, want to change text
attributes and sizes or use a different font for the data. Wait
until you are sure that no further changes will be made to the
spreadsheet.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Graphics
     List Files
     Tables

A)Styles(A

     Allows you to store sets of formatting commands that can be
applied to various parts of your document.

B)Key Sequence--Creating or Editing a Style(B

          Alt-F8 (Style) or Layout pull-down then Styles
           Create or Edit
           Name; Type; Description; Codes; Enter
           F7 (Exit)

B)Key Sequence--Applying a Style in a Document(B

          [Position cursor where you want to apply style]
           Alt-F8 (Style)
           [Highlight style name]
           On
           <text>
           Off or ─┘ (if you defined ─┘ as Off)

B)Usage--General(B

     You can set up styles for each element in your document and
use the style instead of formatting text as you type. For example,
you can use one style for quotations, and you can define other
styles for each level of heading you are using in your documents.
For instance, if you want all level-1 headings to be boldfaced and
centered, you can define that style. Then, when you are typing a
level-1 heading in your text, you can simply turn on the style
instead of pressing F6 for bold and Shift-F6 for center. If you
work with complex design elements, such as multicolumn formats and
a variety of type styles, this feature can save you many
keystrokes throughout a document.
     WordPerfect 5.1 comes with several predefined styles for a
bibliography, two types of documents, a legal pleading, and right-
justified paragraph numbers. You can use these styles, edit them
for your own purposes, or create new styles.

B)Usage--Style Types(B

     You can use two different types of styles in WordPerfect 5.0:
paired and open. In version 5.1, you can also use an outline style
that is used with paragraph and outline numbers; you can define a
style for each level of numbering (see Outlining and Paragraph
Numbering). In a paired style, the codes are turned on and then
turned off at the end of the text element, such as turning off
bold at the end of the heading or returning to normal size after a
quotation in smaller type. Open styles are not turned off, so they
are appropriate for setting the style of an entire document, such
as margins, justification, line spacing, and so forth.

B)Usage--Creating a Style(B

     To create a style:

       1. Select the Style menu.
       2. Select Create; then select Name.
       3. Enter a descriptive name for the style, such as 1 head
          (for level-1 headings). You can use up to 11 characters.
       4. To select whether the style is to be paired or open,
          select Type; then select Open or Paired.
       5. To enter a description of the style you are creating,
          select Description; then enter a short description (up
          to 54 characters) of the style.
       6. You can use both text and codes in a style. To indicate
          to WordPerfect which codes you want generated when you
          use this style, select Codes and press the appropriate
          keys to generate the codes. For example, if you want
          level-1 heads to be centered and boldfaced, press Center
          (Shift-F6) and Bold (F6). If you are defining a paired
          style, type the codes that are to be used when the style
          is turned on before the [Comment] on the screen. Move
          the cursor past the comment and then type the codes that
          you want WordPerfect to generate when the style is
          turned off after the [Comment]. For example, to insert
          boldfacing codes, press Bold (F6), to generate the
          [BOLD] code; then press Right Arrow to move past the
          [Comment]. Press F6 again to generate the [bold] code.
          If the style is being used to mark text--as for an index
          or table of contents heading, for example--press Block
          (Alt-F4) before the [Comment], move the cursor past the
          [Comment], and then press the appropriate keys to
          generate the correct Mark Text code. For example, to
          mark a heading for a level-1 table of contents entry,
          you would press Alt-F5, choose ToC, and enter 1 for
          level 1.

     Note: In WordPerfect 5.1, you can insert graphics in a style.
Press Alt-F9 (Graphics) or choose Graphics from the pull-down
menu; then select the type of graphics box you want to use--
Figure, Table, User-Defined, Line, or Equation (see Graphics).
Press Exit (F7) when you have defined the style.

       7. If you are creating a paired style, you can assign it to
          the ─┘ key by choosing Enter and selecting an option
          for the way the ─┘ key is to function. You can choose
          to have the ─┘ key turn off the style, or you can have
          it turn the style on and then turn it off again. Press
          Exit (F7) to return to the Style menu.

     For a quick way to create a style in an existing document,
mark as a block (Alt-F4) the codes that generate the style you
want to define; then select Style and the Create option. When you
select Codes, you will see that WordPerfect has created a paired
style from the codes you have highlighted. You can then edit these
codes. Be sure to name your new style so that you can remember
what it does.

B)Usage--Using Outline Styles (Version 5.1)(B

     In version 5.1, a new style type, Outline, has been added.
Outline styles are used with outlining and paragraph numbering,
which can have up to eight levels. By using the Outline styles
feature, you can specify a style for each of these numbering
levels.
     You can set up an outline style by using either the
Date/Outline menu or the Styles menu. After you select Outline as
the style type on the Styles:Edit menu, you will be asked to give
the style a name and indicate a level (1 through 8). You will then
be taken to the Outline Styles:Edit menu, which is the same menu
that appears when you use the Date/Outline menu to define an
outline style. You can then assign specific styles to each of the
eight numbering levels, choosing whether they are to be paired or
open, assigning the action of the Enter key, and specifying text
and codes, just as you do for a "regular" style, as discussed
below. After you have set up an outline style, WordPerfect will
follow it when you use paragraph and outline numbering. You can
change to different levels of outline styles by pressing Shift-Tab
and Tab, just as you do with paragraph numbering (see Outlining
and Paragraph Numbering).

B)Usage--Editing a Style(B

     After you have created a style, you can use the Style menu's
Edit option to edit it:

       1. Select Style and highlight the style you want to change.
       2. Choose Edit and edit the style.
       3. Press Exit (F7) when you have finished editing the
          style.

     WordPerfect automatically changes the codes in your document
to conform to the edited style after you have changed it.
     To delete a style, highlight it and select Delete; then type
Y to confirm the deletion.

B)Usage--Applying a Style(B

     To use an open style you have created, press Style (Alt-F8),
use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the style, and select On.
Then type the text that you want to appear in that style. When you
apply an open style, it will affect the entire document from the
cursor's position forward.
     If you are applying a paired style, press Style (Alt-F8), use
the arrow keys to move the cursor to the style, then select On.
When you reach the end of the text you want to have in that style,
press Alt-F8 and select Off. Or, if you have assigned the Off or
Off/On option to the ─┘ key, press ─┘ to turn off the style.
     If you are using a paired style, you can also block the text
you want to apply the style to and then apply the style as
described above. WordPerfect automatically inserts the Style On
and Style Off codes around the blocked text.

B)Usage--Saving and Retrieving Styles(B

     The styles you define for a document are saved with the
document. You can save the styles as a separate document, however,
so that you can apply them to several different documents without
having to define styles in each one. To do this, choose Save from
the Style menu and enter a name for the list of styles displayed
onthe screen. Then, to retrieve those styles into another
document, choose Retrieve from the Style menu and enter the name
of the style list.
     If you retrieve a style list into a document that already has
a list of styles, you will be prompted as to whether you want to
replace the document's existing styles with the new ones that you
are retrieving. Type N to retrieve only the styles that have
different names from the ones in the current document, or type Y
to replace the list on the screen with the list you are
retrieving.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Codes
     Graphics
     Outlining
     Paragraph Numbering

A)Suppress Page Format(A

     Allows you to suppress the printing of page numbers or
headers and footers for the current page.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Page
           Suppress (this page only)
           Suppress All Page Numbers, Headers, and Footers
           Suppress Headers and Footers
           Print Page Numbers at Bottom Center
           Suppress Page Numbering
           Suppress Header A
           Suppress Header B
           Suppress Footer A
           Suppress Footer B
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     To suppress headers, footers, and/or page numbers on a single
page, position the cursor at the top of the page (just under the
dashed line that marks the page break on your screen). Press
Shift-F8 or select the Layout pull-down menu, and then choose the
Page option followed by Suppress for Current Page Only. Next,
select the features (or the combination of features) you want to
suppress.
     To restore a suppressed format, locate the page with the
[Suppress] code and delete that code.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Headers and Footers
     Page Numbering

A)Switch Document(A

     Switches between the Doc 1 and Doc 2 editing screens.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F3 (Switch) or Edit pull-down then Switch
          Document

B)Usage(B

     If the "Block on" message is displayed (indicating that text
has not been marked as a block), pressing Switch (Shift-F3)
switches you to a second document window. Pressing it a second
time returns you to the original document window. You can work
with another document or another version of the same document in
each window.

     Note: If you have marked text as a block, pressing Switch
(Shift-F3) displays the Conversion menu so that you can switch to
uppercase or lowercase.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Case Conversion
     Tables of Authorities
     Tables of Contents
     Windows

A)Tab Align(A

     Aligns text on or around the next tab stop using the
decimal/align character in effect.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F6 (Tab Align)
          or Layout pull-down then Align then Tab Align

B)Usage(B

     Tab Align (Ctrl-F6) aligns text on or around a tab setting
using the alignment character that is in effect. WordPerfect uses
the period as the alignment character unless you specify another
character or symbol. You can use the Tab Align command with any
tab stop that is in effect.
     Characters that you type after pressing Tab Align are
inserted to the left of the cursor, and the cursor remains
stationary at the tab stop until you type the alignment character.
     To change the alignment character from the period to another
character--for example, the colon (:)--follow these steps:

       1. Press Format (Shift-F8) and choose the Other option.
       2. Choose Decimal/Align Char and enter the character you
          want to use as the alignment character--in this case,
          the colon (:). Press ─┘, then press Exit (F7) to return
          to your document.
       3. To then align your text on the colon, press the Tab key
          until you are only one tab stop away from where you want
          the text aligned.
       4. Press Ctrl-F6. The cursor will advance to the next tab
          stop, and you will see this message at the bottom of the
          screen:

          Align Char = :

     As you type your text, it will be entered from right to left,
just as it is when you use a right-justified or decimal tab. As
soon as you type the alignment character--in this case, the
colon--the "Align Char = :" message disappears, and any text you
then type is entered from left to right as though you were using a
left-justified tab. Pressing Tab again or pressing ─┘ leaves text
aligned and simply moves the cursor.
     To return text that was aligned with the Tab Align command to
the previous tab stop, access the Reveal Codes screen (Alt-F3) and
delete the [Align] or [C/A/Flrt] formatting codes that surround
the aligned text. If you press Backspace when the cursor is
located on one of these codes, you will see a message asking you
to confirm the deletion. If you wish to retain the current
alignment, press ─┘. If you do not, type Y.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Columns
     Decimal/Align Character
     Indent
     Indent
     Margin Release
     Margins, Left and Right
     Tabs

A)Tables (Version 5.1)(A

     Allows you to create columns and rows of text easily.

B)Key Sequence--Creating a Table(B

          Alt-F7 (Columns/Table) or Layout pull-down
           Tables
           Create <enter number of columns> ─┘ <enter number
          of rows> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Editing a Table(B

          Alt-F7 (Columns/Table) or Layout pull-down
           Tables
           Edit
           Size; Format; Lines; Header; Math; Options; Join;
          Split
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage--General(B

     WordPerfect 5.1's Tables feature allows you to manipulate
data in columns and rows easily. The automatic Math feature in the
Tables allows you to apply formulas to the columns and rows, a
useful feature for creating forms such as invoices and order
sheets. The Tables feature is also valuable in documents that use
reference aids, since you can also use most of WordPerfect's Mark
Text features, such as footnotes and endnotes, index, and tables
of contents (see Mark Text).
     A table can have as many as 32 columns and 765 rows. Once you
have set up your basic table structure, you can begin entering
data in the cells. Press F7 to remove the Table Edit menu and
begin typing in cells. (To redisplay the menu, press Alt-F7, or
choose Tables and Edit from the Layout pull-down menu.) While the
cursor is in the table, the status line reflects the cell
position. To move to the next cell in the same row, press Tab; to
insert a tab indent in a cell, press Home and then Tab. (For other
cursor-movement techniques in tables, see your reference manual.)
You can also point and click with the mouse to move directly to a
cell, or scroll a table to see a cell that is not displayed on the
screen. As you enter characters within a cell, the cell will
expand to hold what you are typing. All the cells across the row
will expand by the same amount. To format individual cells or
groups of cells, use the Format Cell option (see Tables--
Formatting).
     WordPerfect considers a table to be a table graphics box and
numbers it accordingly with its automatic list-numbering feature
(see Lists). If you are using the Cross-Reference feature to
create an automatic reference, remember that your table is
actually a graphics box and select Graphics Box Number as the
reference type (see Cross-Reference).
     To create a table from text that you have already typed, mark
it as a block, press Alt-F7 and choose Tables (or choose Tables
from the Layout menu); then select Create. Items that were
separated by tabs will be in columns; lines that were separated by
hard returns will be in rows.
     To delete a table, mark it as a block and press Delete or
Backspace; then type Y in response to the "Delete Block?" prompt.
To delete a table's structure but leave its text within the
document, locate and delete the [Table Def] code that corresponds
to the table.
     Note that you can import a spreadsheet or a range of data
into a table without setting up a table structure first (see
Spreadsheet).

B)Usage--Editing Tables(B

     When you choose to edit a table, the program searches
backward from the cursor to the nearest table and displays the
table editing screen. You can also simply move the cursor to a
location within the table you want to edit; then press Alt-F7 to
display the table editing screen quickly. In the table editing
screen, you will see the following menu:

          Ctrl-Arrows Column Widths; Ins Insert; Del Delete; Move
          Move/Copy; 1 Size; 2 Format; 3 Lines; 4 Header; 5 Math;
          6 Options; 7 Join; 8 Split

     You can change column widths by pressing Ctrl and Right Arrow
or Left Arrow while the cursor is within the column you want to
widen or shorten. To add a row or column, press Ins and select
Rows or Columns; this inserts a copy of the current row or column
before the column or above the row where the cursor is. Pressing
Delete and choosing Rows or Columns deletes the row or column
where the cursor is, including any text that is in the cells. You
can restore it with the F1 (Cancel) key. You can also use the Size
option to change the number of rows and columns in the table. In
addition, if you have an enhanced keyboard, you can add or delete
rows in normal editing mode by pressing Ctrl-Delete or Ctrl-Ins.
     To move or copy a column or row, display the Table Edit menu,
then press Ctrl-F4 (Move) when the cursor is in the column or row
you want to work with or after you have blocked the cells you want
to cut or copy. This feature works like the Move feature in the
normal editing screen: you can choose to move or copy a row,
column, or block; press ─┘ to retrieve it at its new location.
     The Size option allows you to add and delete rows and columns
from the end of a table. After you select Size, you can choose
either Rows or Columns. WordPerfect will display the number of
rows (or columns) that are currently in the table. Add the number
of rows (or columns) you want to add to the table to this number,
then enter the total number. For example, if you want to add two
rows to a five-row table, enter 7. To delete rows and columns,
subtract the number you want to delete from the number that
WordPerfect displays. Rows and columns at the end (bottom and
right) of the table will be deleted, along with any text that is
in them. Columns and rows that you delete with this option cannot
be restored with the F1 (Cancel) key.
     Use the Lines option to determine the types of lines (also
called rules or borders) that you want to have printed around the
table. WordPerfect treats these lines as graphics, so if your
printer cannot print graphics, your printed tables will not have
lines. You will see the following menu:

          Lines: 1 Left; 2 Right; 3 Top; 4 Bottom; 5 Inside; 6
          Outside; 7 All; 8 Shade

After you select the lines you want to change, you can choose from
the following options:

          1 None; 2 Single; 3 Double; 4 Dashed; 5 Dotted; 6 Thick;
          7 Extra Thick

     The Shade option on the Lines menu allows you to turn shading
on and off in the cell where the cursor is or in the group of
cells you have highlighted. To set the percentage of shading, use
Options (see below).
     If a table is too long to fit on one page, WordPerfect will
carry it to the next page, breaking it at a row. You can use the
Header feature on the Table Edit menu to repeat a row of
information at the top of each page. You will not see this header
displayed on subsequent pages unless you use the View Document
option (see View Document). However, the status line will show an
asterisk next to the cell location on the status line when the
cursor is in a header row.
     To protect an area of a table from being broken between
pages, mark as a block the rows that should not be broken and
press Shift-F8 (Format), or choose Protect Block from the Edit
menu, which turns on block protection (see Block Protect).
     WordPerfect assumes that the Math feature is on in tables. If
you select Math, you can enter formulas and make calculations (see
Using Math in Tables below).
     To specify how your table is to be displayed, select Options.
You will then see a menu that lets you specify the exact spacing
between text and lines and specify the percentage of gray shading
to use when shading is turned on for a cell; the default is 10%.
It also lets you choose whether negative numbers are to be
displayed with a leading minus sign or in parentheses, as some
financial applications use.
     In addition, you can choose how the table is positioned on
the page by using the Position option. Normally, WordPerfect
aligns the table with the left margin, but you can choose Right
(to align it with the right margin), Center (to center it between
the margins), Full (to adjust its width to fill the space between
the margins), or Set Position (to enter an offset from the left
margin). When WordPerfect first creates a table, all the columns
are a fixed size, so that the table appears to occupy all the
space between the margins, but as you adjust the size of columns
by sizing them or entering text into them, you will see the table
change in size. If you are using a Left position, the table will
shrink toward the left margin as you decrease the size of a column
in it.
     The Join and Split options let you join several cells that
you have highlighted or split a cell into several rows or columns.
If you join multiple cells, text that was in them will be
separated with tabs to indicate where the column breaks were and
hard returns where the rows were. If you split a cell, you will be
prompted to choose whether you want to split it into rows or
columns, and how many you want to have. Any text that is in a
split cell will remain in the first cell after the split.

B)Usage--Using Math in Tables(B

     If you have used WordPerfect's Math feature before, you will
already be familiar with the Math feature that is found in Tables,
although you may find it somewhat easier to use since all you have
to do is specify formulas that are to operate on groups of cells.
In addition to using the basic Math functions (add, subtract,
multiply, and divide), once you have set up a formula in a cell,
you can copy it into other cells.
     Formulas that you enter can reference any cell that is in the
table, such as A4+B5*.065 (to calculate 6.5% sales tax on data in
cells A4 and B5, for example), or they can simply be calculations
that do not use any cell, such as 4*23.5. To enter a formula such
as B1+B2 (which will add whatever you enter in cell B1 to whatever
you enter in cell B2), move the cursor to the cell that you want
to hold the formula, press Alt-F7 to bring up the table editing
screen, choose Math, and then choose Formulas. You will see an
"Enter/Formula:" prompt. Enter the formula, using the operators +,
-, /, *, and = (you cannot use %; enter percentages as a decimal
number). When you press ─┘, the formula will be entered into the
cell. The formula will be shown at the bottom-left corner of the
screen when the cursor is in the cell.
     You can enter data into cells that contain formulas. However,
WordPerfect will not calculate the results of formulas in a table
until you select Calculate from the Math menu, so the table on the
screen may display erroneous results until you calculate it. Also,
to be used correctly in calculations, text that is in cells must
be numeric.
     Once you have set up a formula, you can copy it into other
cells by using Copy Formula. You will then need to enter the cell
address where you want to copy the formula. Select Cell and enter
a cell address, or, if you want to copy the formula into several
contiguous cells, select Down or Right and enter the number of
times you want the formula copied. The formula will be copied
relative to its new address; for example, if the original formula
is A1+A2 and you copy it down two rows, the new formulas will be
A2+A3 and A3+A4.
     If you add, move, or delete columns that are used in
calculations, you will need to revise the formulas that involve
them.
     The special operators +, =, and * can be used to create
subtotals (+), totals (=), and grand totals (*). They work just as
they do with the Math feature (see Math). In tables, however, you
must enter these operators by selecting them from the menu after
you select Math.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Protect
     Cross-Reference
     Display Pitch
     Graphics
     Lists
     Mark Text
     Math
     Sort and Select
     Spreadsheet
     Tables--Formatting
     View Document

A)Tables--Formatting (Version 5.1)(A

     Allows you to format individual cells or groups of cells when
the Table Edit menu is displayed:

B)Key Sequence(B

          Alt-F7 (Columns/Table) or Layout pull-down
           Tables
           Edit
           Format
           C Cell (Type; Attributes; Justify; Vertical
          Alignment; Lock); Column (Width; Attributes; Justify; #
          Digits); Row Height (Single Line: Fixed; Auto; Multi-
          Line: Fixed; Auto)

B)Usage--General(B

     You can mark a group of cells as a block and apply format
changes to them, or you can format an individual cell or column.
In addition, you can set row height for a row of cells. When you
use the Format option on the table editing screen, you will see
the following menu:

          1 Cell; 2 Column; 3 Row Height

B)Usage--Formatting Cells(B

     If you choose Cell, you can select from the following
choices:

          Cell: 1 Type; 2 Attributes; 3 Justify; 4 Vertical
          Alignment; 5 Lock

     The first option, Type, allows you to specify whether a cell
contains text or is numeric (the default). Numeric cells can be
used in calculations, but if you have cells that contain
information that will never be calculated, such as phone numbers,
you can specify those cells as text.
     Attributes allows you to set size and appearance attributes
for the cell or group of cells. However, you can boldface or
underline information in a cell without using this option; move
the cursor to the cell and press F6 (Bold) or F8 (Underline).
     Justify allows you to specify left, center, right, full, or
decimal alignment for the text in the cell(s). Select Reset to
return the alignment in the cell to whatever alignment is being
used in the column.
     Vertical Alignment lets you specify Top, Bottom, or Center
(the default) as the method for displaying text vertically in the
cell. Any changes you make will not be apparent on the screen, but
you will be able to see them in View Document or when you print
the document.
     Lock lets you protect a cell's contents from being changed.
Nothing can be entered into a locked cell once it has been locked.
When the cursor is in a locked cell, its cell address is shown in
brackets on the status line.

B)Usage--Formatting Columns(B

     If you select Column on the Format menu, you will see these
options:

          1 Width; 2 Attributes; 3 Justify; 4 # Digits

     The first option, Width, lets you specify a column width.
Normally, WordPerfect calculates the distance between the right
and left margins and then divides that width by the number of
columns you want in the table. This option overrides that setting.
You can also change column widths without using the Tables Edit
menu (but when it is displayed) by simply pressing Ctrl-Right
Arrow or Ctrl-Left Arrow when the cursor is within the column
whose width you want to change.
     Attributes lets you set size and appearance attributes for
the column; Normal turns off any column attributes that you have
set.
     Justify allows you to specify justification for the column.
The choices are the same as for cells (see above).
     The last option, # Digits, lets you specify the number of
decimal places that will be treated as significant in
calculations. It does not limit the number of digits that can be
entered in the cells in the column.

B)Usage--Changing Row Height(B

     If you choose Row Height on the Format menu, you will see the
following menu:

          Row Height--Single Line: 1 Fixed; 2 Auto; Multi-Line: 3
          Fixed; 4 Auto

     Normally, WordPerfect calculates the height of a row of cells
automatically so that all the text that is in the cells will
display and print properly. However, you can override this setting
for either a single row of cells or several rows that you have
first marked as a block. WordPerfect will convert whatever you
enter to inches (the default unit of measurement), unless you have
changed the default unit of measurement or unless you enter the
number followed by an abbreviation indicating a different unit of
measurement. If the text in a row will not fit in the fixed height
you enter, it will not be displayed or printed, but it will still
be there if you later change back to automatic row height or enter
a row height that will accommodate the text. Use the Single Line
settings for rows in which you want text to have only one line per
cell; use Multi-Line for rows in which cells can contain more than
one line of text.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Tables

A)Tables of Authorities(A

     Allows you to generate in a legal document a list of
citations that is automatically maintained by WordPerfect.

B)Key Sequence--Marking Citations(B

     To mark the full form for the table:

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight text to be cited]
           Alt-F5 (Mark Text) then ToA
          or Mark pull-down then Table of Authorities then Mark
          Full
           ToA Section Number (Press Enter for Short Form
          only): <section number between 1 and 16> ─┘
           [enter full form] F7
           Short Form: <short form name> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Defining the Table Style(B

     To define the style of the table of authorities:

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Define
           Define Table of Authorities
           <section number> ─┘
           Dot Leaders; Underlining Allowed; Blank Line Between
          Authorities
           F7 (Exit)

B)Key Sequence--Generating a Table of Authorities(B

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Generate
           Generate Tables, Indexes, Cross-References, etc.
           Existing tables, lists, and indexes will be
          replaced. Continue? Yes (No) ─┘ (or press any key
          except N)


B)Usage--General(B

     Tables of authorities are used in legal documents as lists of
citations. Creating them involves essentially the same three steps
as creating tables of contents: (1) marking the citations, (2)
defining the style, and (3) generating the table.
     You can divide a table of authorities into 16 sections, such
as statutes, regulations, treaties, and so forth. Within each
section, WordPerfect sorts the authorities alphanumerically.

B)Usage--Marking Citations(B

     To mark citations for inclusion in a table of authorities:

       1. Move to the beginning of the document. You can press
          Search (F2) or Extended Search (Home F2) and specify the
          citation you wish to find in the document, or simply
          move to the first occurrence of the citation.
       2. Mark the first occurrence of the citation in its full
          form by highlighting the entire citation.
       3. Press Alt-F5 (Mark Text) and select ToA, or choose Table
          of Authorities from the Mark menu; then choose Mark
          Full.
       4. The following prompt appears:

          ToA Section Number (Press Enter for Short Form Only):

          For the first occurrence of the citation, enter the
          number of the section in which you want the citation to
          be listed in the table of authorities. If this is not
          the first occurrence and you have already defined a
          short form, simply press ─┘ to have WordPerfect mark
          the citation and its section number for you.
       5. For the first occurrence of the citation, WordPerfect
          presents you with an editing screen in which you can
          edit the full form of the citation. The text can be up
          to 30 lines long, and you can use different character
          styles (bold, italics, and so forth), different fonts,
          and formats such as indentation.
       6. When you have edited the full form of the citation,
          press Exit (F7). WordPerfect then presents you with a
          suggested short form (the first 40 characters of the
          full form) on the prompt line. You can shorten the short
          form even further or accept the program's suggestion by
          simply pressing ─┘. The short form must be unique for
          each citation.
      7.  Search for the next occurrence of the citation by using
          Search (F2) to move directly to it, or press Home F2 to
          do an extended search through text, graphic boxes,
          footnotes, and endnotes.
      8.  When the program stops at the next occurrence of the
          citation, press Mark Text (Alt-F5) and select ToA Short
          Form. The program displays the short form you have
          defined. Press ─┘ to accept it and mark the citation in
          the document, or choose Table of Authorities from the
          Mark menu; then choose Mark Short. (If no text is
          blocked, the Mark Full option will be in brackets.)

B)Usage--Defining the Style(B

     To define the style of a table of authorities:

       1. Move the cursor to the location where you want the table
          of authorities to be generated, usually at the beginning
          of the document.
       2. Press Ctrl-─┘ to insert a hard page break. Renumber the
          first text page as page 1 so that references will be
          accurate. Position the cursor on the new page and type
          the heading you want for the table, such as Table of
          Authorities; press ─┘ twice to move to a new line.
       3. Define each section as you want it to be included in the
          table. Enter the section name (such as CASES or
          STATUTES). Press Alt-F6 (Flush Right) to align the
          heading Page: at the right margin, and enter "Page:".
          Press ─┘ to move to a new line to separate the heading
          from the entries that will be generated. Then press Mark
          Text (Alt-F5) and select Define, or choose Define from
          the Mark menu. Select Define Table of Authorities, enter
          the section number at the prompt, and press ─┘.
       4. Select the style you wish to use in that section from
          the options that appear. You can choose whether to use
          dot leaders, allow underlining, or allow space between
          citations. Press ─┘ to return to the document.
       5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each section.

     If you don't start with a new page number between the
definition of the table of authorities and the first text that has
been marked for inclusion in the table, your page number
references may not be accurate, and WordPerfect will warn you if
it does not find a New Page Number code.

B)Usage--Generating a Table of Authorities(B

     After you have marked text for your table of authorities and
defined the style of the sections, you can generate the table
itself, as shown in the key sequence.
     The table will be generated at the [Def Mark] code where you
defined the document. If your computer does not have sufficient
RAM to hold the entire table in memory, you may be asked to close
the Doc 2 window (see Switch Document) so that WordPerfect can use
more memory for generating the table.
     To delete a table of authorities, be sure to delete both the
[Def Mark] code and the [End Def] code marking the end of the
table. If WordPerfect finds a [Def Mark] code but no [End Def]
code, it will continue to generate a table of authorities each
time you generate your tables and lists.

B)Usage--Editing a Table of Authorities(B

     To edit the full form of a citation in a table of authorities
after you have generated the table, position the cursor to the
right of the code for the full form in the Reveal Codes screen.
Then select Define from the Mark Text menu (Alt-F5), and select
Edit Table of Authorities Full Form. If you are using pull-down
menus, select Table of Authorities from the Mark menu; then choose
Edit Full.
     The citation will be displayed on the screen. After you have
edited it, press Exit (F7). Then enter the section number to which
this citation belongs and press ─┘.
     You must then generate a new table of authorities to update
the changes you have made.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Mark Text
     Page Numbering
     Switch Document

A)Tables of Contents(A

     Allows you to generate from entries in your document a table
of contents that is automatically maintained by WordPerfect.

B)Key Sequence--Marking an Entry(B

          Alt-F4 (Block) or Edit pull-down then Block
           [highlight text to be included]
           Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           ToC
           ToC Level: <level number between 1 and 5> ─┘

B)Key Sequence-Defining the Style(B

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Define
           Define Table of Contents
           Number of Levels <1-5>
           Display Last Level in Wrapped Format No (Yes)
           Page Numbering (None; Pg # Follows; (Pg#) Follows;
          Flush Rt; Flush Rt with Leader) [repeat for levels 1
          through 5 as needed]
           F7 (Exit)

B)Key Sequence--Generating a Table of Contents(B

          Alt-F5 (Mark Text) or Mark pull-down
           Generate
           Generate Tables, Indexes, Cross-References, etc.
           Existing tables, lists, and indexes will be
          replaced. Continue? Yes (/No) ─┘ (or press any key
          except N)

B)Usage--General(B

     Creating a table of contents consists of three basic steps:
(1) marking the headings, (2) defining the style, and (3)
generating the table.

B)Usage--Marking Heading Levels(B

     You can mark up to five levels of headings to be included in
a table of contents. For each heading you want included in the
table of contents, follow these steps:

       1. Press Alt-F4 to mark the heading as a block.
       2. Press Mark Text (Alt-F5). If you are using pull-down
          menus, choose Table of Contents from the Mark menu. The
          following prompt appears:

          Mark for: 1 ToC; 2 List; 3 Index; 4 ToA: 0

       3. Select the ToC option. The following prompt appears:

          ToC Level:

       4. Enter the level of the heading (from 1 to 5).
       5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each item you want to
          include in the table of contents.

     WordPerfect inserts [Mark] and [End Mark] codes around each
entry as you mark it. To remove the markings so that an item will
not be included in the table of contents, delete the [Mark] code.

B)Usage--Defining the Style(B

     When you define the style of a table of contents, WordPerfect
creates the table at that point in your document. For this reason,
go to the beginning of your document, press Ctrl-─┘ to create a
new, blank page, and type any heading you may want for the
contents page, such as Contents. Then press ─┘ to add space
between the heading and the table entries that will be generated
at that point.
     To define the format of the contents page (required before
you can generate a table of contents):

       1. Press Mark Text (Alt-F5) and select the Define option.
          If you are using pull-down menus, select Define from the
          Mark menu.
       2. Select Define Table of Contents. The Table of Contents
          Definition screen appears.
       3. Select Number of Levels and enter the number of heading
          levels you are using in the table of contents (1-5).
       4. Select Display Last Level in Wrapped Format and type Y
          if you want the last level of entries to be wrapped on
          one line, rather than listed vertically. If you enter Y,
          WordPerfect displays the headings with the last level as
          one wrapped line and the headings and page numbers
          separated by semicolons. The default is No.
       5. Select Page Numbering Position and enter a numbering
          style for each level. Choose option 1 or N to print
          headings only, with no page numbers. If you choose
          option 2 or 3 (or P or (), page numbers will occur next
          to headings, and with option 3 or (, they will be in
          parentheses. Options 4 and 5 (or F and L) place page
          numbers flush right, with or without dot leaders.

B)Usage--Generating a Table of Contents(B

     After you have marked text for your table of contents,
created a page for it, and defined its style, you can generate the
table itself, as shown in the key sequence.
     The table will be generated at the [Def Mark] code where you
defined the document. If your computer does not have sufficient
RAM to hold the entire table in memory, you may be asked to close
the Doc 2 window so that WordPerfect can use more of the memory
for generating the table.
     To delete a table of contents, be sure to delete both the
[Def Mark] code and the [End Def] code marking the end of the
table. If WordPerfect finds a [Def Mark] code but no [End Def]
code, it will continue to generate a table of contents each time
you generate your tables and lists.
     If you edit your document so that page breaks change, be sure
to generate a new table of contents. WordPerfect does not
automatically update tables of contents as page changes occur.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Cross-Reference
     Indexes
     Master Document
     Lists
     Mark Text
     Page Numbering
     Switch Document

A)Tabs(A

     Allows you to change the tab settings in your document.

B)Key Sequence--Entering Equally Spaced Tabs(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Line
           Tab Set
           <start position>,<increment spacing> ─┘
           F7 F7 (Exit)

B)Key Sequence--Clearing All Tabs(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Line
           Tab Set
           Ctrl-End (Delete End of Line)
           [move cursor to desired position(s) on ruler]
           Type; Left; Right; Decimal; . = Dot Leader
           F7 F7 (Exit)

B)Usage--General(B

     WordPerfect is preset with left-justified tabs every ½ inch
up to position 8.5". To move to the next tab setting, use the Tab
key.
     To set individual tabs, select Format, then Line. Select Tab
Set, and the Tab Set menu will appear. To select a new tab stop,
move the cursor to the position on the ruler line where you want
the new tab and type L for a left-justified tab, R for a right-
justified tab, C for a centered tab, D for a decimal tab, or .
(period) for a dot-leader tab. You can indicate that dot leaders
be used with left, right, or decimal tabs by moving the cursor to
the L, R, or C tab that has already been set and typing a period.
As you type, when you press Tab and the next tab has been set as a
dot-leader tab, you will see the dot leaders appear on your
screen.
     The following table illustrates the various types of tabs you
can set.

Types of Tabs:
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     TAB TYPE            HOW SET   EXAMPLE
     Left-justified      L                           First Quarter
                                   ..................L............
     Right-justified     R         First Quarter
                                   ............R..................
     Centered            C                  First Quarter
                                   ...............C...............
     Decimal             D               $1,256.00
                                   ............D..................
     Dot-leader left     L         Benefits...........Section 1.11
                                   L..................L...........
     Dot-leader right    R         Benefits...Section 1.11
                                   L.....................R........
     Dot leader decimal  D         Benefits......Section 1.11
                                   L......................D.......

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

     You may use the spacebar or the Right Arrow key to position
the cursor on the tab ruler line to see where these tabs appear in
relation to your text. You can also type the number of the
position where you want a tab and press ─┘. For example, to set a
tab at the 6.3" mark, type 6.3 and press ─┘. In WordPerfect 5.1,
you can determine whether tabs are relative to the left margin
(the default) or an absolute distance from the left margin, as in
WordPerfect 5.0. An absolute (or hard) tab will remain in the same
position even when you change margin settings; the tab ruler shows
it as a distance from the left edge of the page. In version 5.1,
tabs are relative--that is, they remain in place relative to the
left margin so that even when you change the left margin, a tab
set as +1 remains one inch from the left margin. To change the
type of tab from relative to absolute, select Type from the tab
ruler menu; then choose Absolute. You can also enter hard tabs in
version 5.1 in the following way:

     TO ENTER       PRESS          CODE
     Hard Left      Home Tab       [TAB]
     Hard Right     Home Alt-F6    [RGT TAB]
     Hard Center    Home Shift-F6  [CNTR TAB]
     Hard Decimal   Ctrl-F6        [DEC TAB]

     To delete the existing tabs and set new ones, press Home Home
Left Arrow to move to the beginning of the line; then press Ctrl-
End to delete the existing tab settings. You do not need to delete
old tab settings before you set new ones, however.
     To delete a single tab, move to the setting on the line; then
press Backspace or Delete.
     To return to your document without setting tabs after you
have displayed the Tab Set menu, press Cancel (F1).

B)Usage--Setting Evenly Spaced Tabs(B

     You can also specify that WordPerfect set tabs in evenly
spaced increments. To do so, select Line from the Format menu,
then select Tab Set. Move the cursor to the beginning of the line,
and press Ctrl-End to delete the existing tab settings. Then move
the cursor to the first tab stop that you want to set and type L,
R, C, or D to establish the style of the evenly spaced tabs you
are setting (left, right, centered, or decimal). If you are using
the default of left-justified tabs, you do not have to take this
step.
     Next, type the number of the character position where you
want tabs to start, type a comma, then type the increment by which
you want them to be spaced. Finally, press Exit (F7) twice to
return to the document.
     For example, to set decimal tabs every inch starting one inch
from the left margin, you would type D at the 1" position, then
type 1,1 and press ─┘.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Columns
     Decimal/Align Character
     Indent
     Indent
     Margin Release
     Margins, Left and Right
     Math
     Tab Align

A)Text In/Out(A

     Allows you to retrieve a DOS text (ASCII) file into
WordPerfect; to save a document as a DOS text, generic,
WordPerfect 5.0, or WordPerfect 4.2 file; to create document
comments; and to assign passwords to documents.

B)Key Sequence--Retrieving a DOS Text File(B

          Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out) then DOS Text then Retrieve (CR/LF
          to HRt); Retrieve (CR/LF to SRt in HZone)
          or File pull-down then Text In then DOS Text (CR/LF to
          HRt); DOS Text (CR/LF to SRt)
           <file name> ─┘

B)Key Sequence--Saving a DOS Text File(B

          Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out)
          or File pull-down then Text Out
           DOS Text
           Save [Specify file name]

B)Key Sequence--Saving a Document(B

     To save a document in generic, WordPerfect 5.0, or
WordPerfect 4.2 format:

          Ctrl-F5 (Text In/Out) then Save As
          or File pull-down then Text out
           Generic; WordPefect 5.0; WordPerfect 4.2
           <file name> ─┘

     Note: The Text In/Out options are slightly different in
WordPerfect 5.0. The Save As options are listed on the Text In/Out
menu (Ctrl-F5) as Save Generic or Save WP 4.2. In addition, you
can retrieve DOS text files from the List Files screen (F5) with
Text In, which is no longer possible in version 5.1, as that
option has been replaced by Short/Long Display.

B)Usage--General(B

     The Text In/Out option allows you to bring DOS text files
into WordPerfect, to save WordPerfect documents in DOS text file
format, to assign password protection to files (see Locking a
File), to save WordPerfect 5.0 and 5.1 files in earlier
WordPerfect formats, to save WordPerfect documents in a generic
word processor format, and to create document comments (see
Document Comments). In version 5.1, a new option, Spreadsheet,
allows you to import spreadsheet files by using this menu (see
Spreadsheet).

B)Usage--Importing and Exporting DOS Text Files(B

     To convert a document to DOS text file (ASCII) format within
WordPerfect, use the DOS Text option on the Text In/Out menu
(Ctrl-F5). If you are using pull-down menus, select Text Out from
the File menu. When you select Save with the keyboard menu or DOS
Text with the pull-down menu, you will be prompted for a file name
for the DOS text file. In this format, most of the codes that
WordPerfect uses to control formatting are removed. Some
WordPerfect codes that control indenting, centering, paragraph
numbering, and the Date function are converted to ASCII codes,
however. All of your document except footnotes and endnotes will
be converted.
     To retrieve a document that is in DOS text file format, use
one of the Retrieve options on the Text In/Out menu instead of
using the Retrieve command (Shift-F10). If you are using pull-down
menus, select Text In from the File menu. You can choose whether
carriage returns and line feeds in the DOS text document are
converted to hard returns (CR/LF to [HRt]) in WordPerfect, so you
get a line-for-line conversion (see Hard Return). If you are
bringing in data or lines of programming code for which you want
to use WordPerfect as a text editor, choose this option, which
preserves the column and row format. You may also want to set your
margins wider before you import the document to make sure that
wide rows are kept intact. (For additional information if you are
bringing in data from a database program to use in mail-merge
operations, see Merge Operations; if you are bringing in data from
a spreadsheet program such as Lotus 1-2-3, see Spreadsheet.)
     If you choose DOS Text (CR/LF to SRt), carriage returns and
line feeds in the DOS text document are converted to soft returns
when they occur in the hyphenation zone (see Hyphenation), so hard
returns will not occur in the middle of a paragraph in the
imported document. You should use this option for word-wrapped
text. You may want to set your margins in WordPerfect as close as
possible to those of the DOS text file so that the same line
breaks occur.
     In WordPerfect 5.0, you can also use the Text In option on
the List Files menu (F5) to retrieve DOS text files (see List
Files). It is the same as the Retrieve (CR/LF to [HRt]) option on
the Text In/Out menu.

B)Usage--Converting to Other Formats(B

     If you are using pull-down menus in WordPerfect 5.1, the Text
Out option allows you to save them as Generic (in generic word
processing format), as WordPerfect 5.0 documents, or as
WordPerfect 4.2 documents. If you are not using pull-down menus,
choose Save As from the Text In/Out menu (Ctrl-F5) and then select
the format you want. WordPerfect 5.0, of course, provides only the
Generic and 4.2 options.
     In Generic word processing format, special WordPerfect format
codes are not saved, but the overall text format is maintained.
Footnotes and endnotes are not converted, however. In place of the
codes that indicate centering, indenting, flush-right text, and
soft returns, spaces are inserted, and <CR><LF> (carriage
return, line feed) codes are inserted in place of hard returns.
     If you convert WordPerfect 5.0 or 5.1 documents to an earlier
version of WordPerfect, be sure to use a different name from that
of the current document so that you do not overwrite it.
     If you are converting 5.1 documents to 5.0 format, the codes
for the features that are new in version 5.1 will be removed from
the document.
     You can retrieve a document that was created in WordPerfect
version 5.1 into WordPerfect version 5.0. Codes that version 5.0
does not recognize will be shown as [Unknown].
     If you are converting 5.0 documents to 4.2 format, you should
be aware that some 4.2 codes, such as font change codes, do not
have equivalents in version 5.0. If you have such codes in your
5.0 document, you can use a special file called STANDARD.CRS to
manually change the codes.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Document Comments
     Hard Return
     Hyphenation
     List Files
     Locking a File
     Merge Operations
     Printing to Disk
     Retrieve
     Spreadsheet

A)Thesaurus(A

     Allows you to look for synonyms for any word in the text of
your document.

B)Key Sequence(B

          [position cursor on word to be looked up]
           Alt-F1 (Thesaurus)
          or Tools pull-down then Thesaurus
           1 Replace Word; 2 View Doc; 3 Look Up Word; 4 Clear
          Column

B)Usage--General(B

     On a floppy disk system, you must first insert the Thesaurus
disk into drive B.

     Note: WordPerfect 5.1 requires that each of your floppy disk
drives be 720K or higher.

     Since WordPerfect normally looks for the Thesaurus on the
default drive, this means you must also change the Thesaurus
default drive to B by using the Setup menu. When you have finished
using the Thesaurus, replace your data disk in drive B and save
any changes. On a hard-disk system, the Thesaurus is installed in
the default directory during the installation process, and no
special instructions are needed.
     There are several ways to look up a word:

       ■  Move the cursor to the word in your document and press
          Thesaurus (Alt-F1).
       ■  If you are already in the Thesaurus, select View Doc,
          move the cursor to the word you want to look up, and
          press Thesaurus (Alt-F1).
       ■  If the word you want to look up is not displayed on the
          screen, press Alt-F1 (to start the Thesaurus), select
          Look Up Word, and then enter the word.

     While you are using the Thesaurus, you will see a few lines
of your document at the top of the screen, along with three
columns of alternatives, grouped into nouns, verbs, adjectives,
and adverbs, as well as antonyms--words of opposite meaning. Any
word preceded by a dot is a headword, which indicates that you can
look up further references to that word by pressing the
accompanying letter. At the bottom of the screen is a menu that
allows you to replace words, view more of your document, and look
up other words.

B)Usage--Replacing a Word(B

     The Replace Word option allows you to replace the highlighted
word in your document with any of the suggested words (with
accompanying letters) that appear on the Thesaurus screen. You can
move between the columns of words by using the Left Arrow and
Right Arrow keys; the letters will follow the cursor, allowing you
to select more words. The Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys as well as
the PgUp and PgDn keys scroll the columns vertically. The Home
Home Up Arrow and Home Home Down Arrow key combinations take you
to the beginning and end of the Thesaurus entry.
     To view groups of related words, type the letter correspond-
ing to any of the headwords (those with dots to their left).

B)Usage--Viewing a Document(B

     The View Doc option allows you to return to view your
document--for example, to get a better idea of the context in
which the word was used. When you are in the document, you can use
the cursor-movement keys to scroll through the text. After using
View Doc, you can return to the Thesaurus screen you were viewing
before by pressing Exit (F7), or you can press Alt-F1 again to
look up another word in the Thesaurus.

B)Usage--Looking Up a Word(B

     The Look Up Word option directs the Thesaurus to look up a
word. WordPerfect will prompt you to enter the word you want to
look up.

B)Usage--Clearing a Column(B

     If your screen becomes cluttered with too many alternative
words, you can use the Clear Column option to clear the column the
cursor is in to make room for more synonyms of another headword.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Language
     Speller--General

A)Typeover(A

     Toggles between the default Insert mode and Typeover mode.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ins

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect is preset for Insert mode, which means that
characters you type are inserted on the screen, with existing
characters being pushed to the right of the cursor. To use
Typeover mode, in which characters you type replace the characters
on the screen, press Ins. A "Typeover" message appears at the
bottom of the screen when Typeover is on. To return to Insert
mode, press Ins again.
     Pressing Tab in Typeover mode does not insert a tab, but
simply moves the cursor to the next tab stop.
     To define a macro in which the typing mode changes, use
WordPerfect's Forced Typeover mode (Home Ins) or Forced Insert
mode (Home Home Ins). Otherwise, each time you execute the macro,
WordPerfect will use the mode you were in when you recorded the
macro.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Line Draw

A)Type Through (Version 5.0)(A

     Allows you to use your printer as a typewriter so that any
character or line you type is immediately printed. This feature is
not available in version 5.1.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print)
           Type Through
           Line; Character
           <characters or line>
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect's Type Through feature (Version 5.0) allows you
to use your keyboard as you would a typewriter. The text you type
is not saved, however, but is sent directly to the printer, so you
need to position the paper so that the printhead is on the first
line to be printed.
     To use the Type Through feature, press Shift-F7 and choose
Type Through. Then select By Line or By Character. Use the By Line
option if you want the characters you type to be sent to the
printer only when you press ─┘. Choose the By Character option if
you want each character to go to the printer as it is typed;
remember, however, that you cannot correct characters if you use
this option.
     When you use Type Through, you are placed in a special Type
Through screen. The line at the top of the screen displays the
previously typed line. You cannot edit it, but if you press Move
(Ctrl-F4) it will be copied to the bottom line, which can be
edited. You can enter up to 200 characters per line; lines that
are too wide to be displayed on the screen will move to the left
as you type.
     While in Type Through mode, you can use the spacebar to move
the cursor to the right. You can also use the arrow keys to move
the cursor right or left, or use Home with the Right Arrow or Left
Arrow key to move the cursor to the beginning or end of a line.
Pressing Format (Shift-F8) allows you to insert printer command
codes (see Printer Command). Press Exit (F7) or Cancel (F1) to
return to the regular editing screen.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Printer Command
     Printing Current Document

A)Undelete(A

     Restores any of the last three deletions at the cursor's
position.

B)Key Sequence(B

          F1 (Cancel) or Edit pull-down then Undelete
            Restore; Previous Deletion

B)Usage(B

     If WordPerfect is not carrying out a command, the Cancel key
(F1) functions as an Undelete key. You can also select Undelete
from the Edit menu, if you are using pull-down menus. The
following prompt appears along with the most recently deleted
text:

          Undelete: 1 Restore; 2 Previous Deletion: 0

Choosing Restore restores the displayed text to your document;
choosing Previous Deletion displays the text that was deleted
prior to that deletion. Three levels of deletions can be displayed
and restored. After the third most recently deleted text is
displayed, selecting Previous Deletion displays the first deletion
again. Selecting Restore restores the displayed deletion to your
document.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Canceling a Command
     Deleting Text
     Esc Key

A)Underline(A

     Underscores selected portions of text.

B)Key Sequence--Underlining New Text(B

          F8 (Underline)
          or Font pull-down then Appearance then Underline
           <text to be underlined>
           F8 (Underline) or Right Arrow

B)Key Sequence--Underlining Existing Text(B

          F4 (Block)
           [highlight text to be underlined]
           F8 Underline
          or Font pull-down
          then Appearance then Underline

B)Usage(B

     To underline new text, press F8 before you type. After you
press F8, the Pos indicator appears underlined, indicating that
text you type will be underlined. To turn underlining off, press
F8 again. You can indicate a block of existing text to be
underlined (by pressing Alt-F4 and marking the block). You can
also select Appearance from the Font pull-down menu; then select
Underline.
     You can also underline text by pressing Font (Ctrl-F8),
selecting Appearance, and selecting Undrln.
     WordPerfect is preset to underline spaces between words but
not spaces created by pressing the Tab key. To change these
settings, choose Other from the Format menu (Shift-F8); then
select Underline.
     To use double underlining in a document, press Font (Ctrl-
F8), select Appearance, and then select Double Underline. You will
not see the double underline on the screen unless you have a
graphics card such as the Hercules Graphics Card Plus, but it will
appear in your document when it is printed.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Operations
     Font

A)View Document(A

     Allows you to preview the way the document will appear when
printed.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F7 (Print) or File pull-down then Print
           View Document
           1 100%; 2 200%; 3 Full Page; 4 Facing Pages
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     Choosing View Document from the Print menu allows you to see
how your document will appear when it is printed, complete with
text elements that are not normally visible on the screen, such as
page numbers and headers. You can select the 100% option to view
the document in its actual size, 200% to see it at twice its
actual size, or Full Page to view the page. If you select the
Facing Pages option, you will see odd-numbered pages on the right
and even-numbered pages on the left.
     Once you have displayed a page or pages, you can use the
cursor-movement keys to scroll through the document, or use the
PgUp, PgDn, Screen Up, and Screen Down keys.
     To see the previewed pages in reverse video, press Switch
(Shift-F3) while you are in the View Document screen.
     To return to your document after previewing it, press Exit
(F7).

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Footnotes and Endnotes
     Graphics
     Headers and Footers
     Justification
     Line Height
     Line Numbering
     Page Numbering
     Printing Current Document
     Rewriting of Screen
     Tables

A)Widow/Orphan Protection(A

     Prevents either the first or last line of a paragraph from
being separated from the rest of the paragraph by a soft page
break.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Line
           Widow/Orphan Protection Y or N
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     Widow/Orphan Protection instructs the program not to leave
the first line of text in a paragraph by itself as the last line
of a page (a widow) or the last line of a paragraph as the first
line of a page (an orphan). Widow lines are forced to the next
page, and orphan lines get one more line added from the previous
page.
     To turn on Widow/Orphan Protection for an entire document,
move the cursor to the beginning of the document. Select Format
(Shift-F8) or the Layout pull-down menu, then select Line option.
Select Widow/Orphan Protection and enter Y. This option is a
toggle; to turn off Widow/Orphan Protection, type N.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Block Protect
     Conditional End of Page
     Page Break, Soft and Hard

A)Windows(A

     Allows you to split the editing screen into two windows in
order to view the text in the Doc 1 and Doc 2 editing areas
simultaneously.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Ctrl-F3 (Screen) or Edit pull-down
           Window
           Number of lines in this window: <number> ─┘ or Up
          Arrow/Down Arrow ─┘

B)Usage(B

     To split the screen into two windows, select Window from the
Screen key menu or the Edit pull-down menu. WordPerfect will
prompt you for the number of lines of text you want to see in the
current window. The screen can display up to 24 lines, so you can
enter any combination that adds up to 24. For example, to see 12
lines in each window, enter 12; to see 18 lines in one window and
6 in the other, enter 18.
     You can also use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to move the
cursor to the position where you want the split to occur, and then
press ─┘. The window will be split at the cursor position.
     To move back and forth between windows, press Switch (Shift-
F3), or choose Switch Document from the Edit pull-down menu (see
Switch Document). To remove the split screen and return to a full-
screen display, press Ctrl-F3, select Window, and this time enter
0 or 24 as the number of lines you want displayed. The second
document will still be in memory, and you can return to it at any
time by pressing Switch (Shift-F3).
     You can view the same document in each of the two windows by
retrieving it into both windows--for example, if you want to see
the beginning and end of a long document at the same time. Both
documents will have the same file name, however, so you will have
to keep track of which version you want to have as the final saved
version.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Switch Document

A)Word/Letter Spacing(A6

     Allows you to adjust the spacing between letters of a word
and/or between words in a line.

B)Key Sequence(B

          Shift-F8 (Format) or Layout pull-down
           Other
           Printer Functions
           Word Spacing/Letter Spacing
           Word Spacing: Normal; Optimal; Percent of Optimal
          ─┘; Set Pitch ─┘
           Letter Spacing: Normal; Optimal; Percent of Optimal;
          Set Pitch
           F7 (Exit)

B)Usage(B

     WordPerfect's Word/Letter Spacing option allows you to adjust
the spacing between words and between letters within words. When
you justify text, for example, you may want to adjust the amount
of space that the program adds between words to make the line of
text come out even with the right margin (see Justification).
Letter spacing is normally used to add spaces between letters,
creating a visual effect that is widely seen in company logos and
on business cards, for example. In its opposite, called kerning,
the amount of space between letters is reduced (see Kerning).
Leading is the space between lines (see Leading).
     To change the word or letter spacing, select Format (or pull
down the Layout menu) and select Other. Next, select Printer
Functions, and choose Word Spacing/Letter Spacing from the menu
that appears. You can then select a setting for word spacing,
letter spacing, or both. Press F to see a figure illustrating this
screen.
     The Normal setting sets spacing between words as well as
letters to the amount recommended by the manufacturer of your
printer. Optimal, which is the default, produces the setting that
looks best according to the manufacturer of WordPerfect. The
Optimal and Normal settings are often, but not always, the same.
     If you want to specify the amount of space to be used between
words and letters, choose Percent of Optimal and enter a
percentage. Percentages less than 100% reduce the amount of space,
and percentages greater than 100% enlarge it. Normally, you will
not want to change the default setting unless you want to create
special typographic effects.
     If you want to adjust the spacing between words and letters
in terms of pitch (characters per inch), use the Set Pitch option
and enter the pitch you want to use. WordPerfect then calculates
the correct Percent of Optimal setting needed to generate that
pitch in the font you are currently using.

------------------------------------------------------------------

                  [For related topics, press R]

B)See Also(B

     Justification
     Kerning
     Leading